You are on page 1of 326

NON CLASSIFICATO/UNCLASSIFIED

IDENTIFICATION: C13004.02-1083UM rev. 01.00


DATE: 15/10/2014
APPLICABILITY: Security & Smart System Division

PROGRAM: New Vietnam Hanoi ACC

USER MANUAL

Controller Working Position (CWP)

Nr of Pages
Classification / Classificazione
/ No. pagine
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
326 Total nr. of pages / No. totale delle pagine

The information contained in this document is proprietary to Selex ES S.p.A. This document and the information contained herein may not
be copied, reproduced, used or disclosed in whole or in part in any form without the prior written consent of Selex ES S.p.A.

© Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved


15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Document Authority

Responsible:

System Engineer ..........................................................


Chiara Conti

Approval:

Technical Head ..........................................................


Stefano Chini

Approval:

Quality Manager ..........................................................


Emiliano Marini

Authorization:

Program Manager ..........................................................


Massimo Panetta

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 2 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

MODIFICATION RECORD

Rev. Modification N. Date Description Author/s


01.00 15/10/2014 First issue C. Conti

DEFINITIONS AND ACRONYMS

Please refer to [1].

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 3 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 15


1.1 IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................................................... 15
1.2 System Overview .......................................................................................................... 15
1.3 Document Overview ..................................................................................................... 15
2 DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................................... 16
2.1 Reference Document .................................................................................................... 16
3 I/O DEVICES ............................................................................................................................ 17
3.1 Input Devices ................................................................................................................ 17
3.1.1 Pointing Device ............................................................................................................. 17
3.1.2 Keyboard ...................................................................................................................... 17
3.2 Output Devices ............................................................................................................. 18
3.2.1 Screen(s) ...................................................................................................................... 18
3.2.2 Strip Printer(s) .............................................................................................................. 19
4 HMI GENERIC CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................................... 19
4.1 Symbol And Characters ................................................................................................ 19
4.2 Colours ......................................................................................................................... 20
4.3 Layering ........................................................................................................................ 22
4.3.1 Objects Priority ............................................................................................................. 22
4.4 Lines ............................................................................................................................. 23
5 USER ADMINISTRATION ........................................................................................................ 24
5.1 User Login and Logout.................................................................................................. 24
5.2 User HMI Settings......................................................................................................... 24
6 WINDOWS ................................................................................................................................ 25
6.1 Windows Composition .................................................................................................. 25
6.1.1 Window components and attributes .............................................................................. 25
6.1.2 Window types ............................................................................................................... 26
6.1.3 Operational Windows .................................................................................................... 27
6.2 Preview Window ........................................................................................................... 27
6.3 Choice Window ............................................................................................................. 28
6.4 Tabular Window ............................................................................................................ 28
7 PROCESSING PROCEDURES ................................................................................................ 29
7.1 PROCESSING ENVIRONMENTS ................................................................................ 29
7.2 Air Atco Functions (CWP) ............................................................................................. 29
7.2.1 Planning (PLN) Function ............................................................................................... 29
7.2.2 Executive (EXE) Function ............................................................................................. 29
7.2.3 Executive and Planner (EXP) Function ......................................................................... 30
7.2.4 Watcher (WTC) Function .............................................................................................. 30
8 SURVEILLANCE MANAGEMENT............................................................................................ 30
8.1 Radar data presentation ............................................................................................... 30
8.2 Radar data presentation in Rdp .................................................................................... 30
8.3 Radar data presentation in Dard ................................................................................... 31
9 FLIGHT PLAN STATES ........................................................................................................... 31

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 4 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

9.1 Air Flight Plan States .................................................................................................... 31


10 HMI DESCRIPTION FOR CWP ................................................................................................ 35
10.1 Radar Pictures .............................................................................................................. 35
10.1.1 General Radar Pictures ................................................................................................ 35
10.1.2 Additional Radar Pictures ............................................................................................. 36
10.1.3 RADAR PICTURE MANAGEMENT .............................................................................. 37
10.2 Radar Picture Toolbar ................................................................................................... 40
10.2.1 Local Data Area Toolbar ............................................................................................... 40
10.2.2 Local Data Area Toolbar Management ......................................................................... 43
10.2.3 SLDA/TLDA/FLDA Tool Bar .......................................................................................... 73
10.3 Radar Track Label States, Format And Fields .............................................................. 73
10.3.1 Radar Track Presentation ............................................................................................. 73
10.3.2 Radar Track Label States ............................................................................................. 75
10.3.3 Radar Track Label Format ............................................................................................ 75
10.4 Alarm Presentation on Air Radar Track Label ............................................................... 84
10.5 Menu And Order Management...................................................................................... 86
10.5.1 Track Menu................................................................................................................... 86
10.5.2 Map Menu..................................................................................................................... 94
10.5.3 List Menu .....................................................................................................................116
10.5.4 Radar Menu .................................................................................................................117
10.5.5 Configuration Menu .....................................................................................................119
10.5.6 Planner Menu ..............................................................................................................135
10.5.7 Executive Menu ...........................................................................................................162
10.5.8 Flight Menu ..................................................................................................................179
10.5.9 Cpdlc Menu .................................................................................................................210
10.5.10 Supervisor Menu ........................................................................................................230
10.6 Operational Windows And System Management .........................................................243
10.6.1 System Data and Message Area (SDMA) ....................................................................243
10.6.2 Operational Data Area (ODA) ......................................................................................245
10.6.3 Diagnostic List (DIAG) .................................................................................................246
10.7 Lists Management .......................................................................................................246
10.7.1 Arrival List (ARR) .........................................................................................................249
10.7.2 Departure List (DEP) ...................................................................................................251
10.7.3 Flight Directory (FLDI)..................................................................................................254
10.7.4 Sector List (SCL) .........................................................................................................256
10.7.5 Pending List (PND) ......................................................................................................260
10.7.6 Start-up List (STARTUP) .............................................................................................261
10.7.7 Taxi List (TAXI) ............................................................................................................264
10.7.8 Visual Flight Rule List (VFR) ........................................................................................265
10.7.9 Mode-S Directory List (MODE-S) .................................................................................266
10.7.10 Runway List (RWY) ....................................................................................................268
10.7.11 Holding List (HOLDING) .............................................................................................269
10.7.12 Special Entry List (SEL) ..............................................................................................271
10.7.13 Coast List Table (CSL) ...............................................................................................272
10.7.14 Browse List (BRW) .....................................................................................................273
10.7.15 Flight Hooked Information (FHI) .................................................................................275
10.7.16 Alarm List (RDPAL) ....................................................................................................278
10.7.17 Mtcd List(MTCD) ........................................................................................................280
10.7.18 Flight Plan Extended Data List (FLDA) .......................................................................282
10.7.19 Flight Plan Message List (FPLM) ................................................................................283

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 5 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.7.20 Vertical Aid Window (VAW) ........................................................................................284


10.7.21 Glide Path Window (GPW) .........................................................................................285
10.7.22 CPDLC HISTORY WINDOW ......................................................................................286
10.7.23 DL flight List ...............................................................................................................287
10.7.24 CPDLC MESSAGE WINDOWS ..................................................................................288
10.8 Electronic Strip Bay .....................................................................................................292
10.8.1 Electronic Strip Layouts on Tower Position ..................................................................293
10.8.2 Electronic Strip Layouts on Approach Position .............................................................295
10.8.3 Electronic Strip Layouts on ACC Position ....................................................................297
10.8.4 Electronic Strip Contents .............................................................................................300
10.8.5 Electronic Strips Interactions........................................................................................303
10.8.6 Electronic Strips Colours Customization ......................................................................304
10.8.7 Distribution of Stripsto Controllers ................................................................................307
10.8.8 Paper Strip Layouts .....................................................................................................308
10.9 Mtcd Management .......................................................................................................308
10.9.1 Aircraft To Aircraft Encounters .....................................................................................308
10.10 What-if Management ...................................................................................................313
10.11 MODE – S Management ..............................................................................................317
10.12 Warning And Reminders Management ........................................................................321
10.13 SNET Management .....................................................................................................321
10.13.1 Short Term Conflict Alert (STCA)................................................................................322
10.13.2 Area Proximity Infringement Warning (APW) ..............................................................322
10.13.3 Minimum Safe Altitude Warning (MSAW) ...................................................................322
10.13.4 Approach Path Alarm Monitoring (APAM) ...................................................................322
10.13.5 Safety Net Region Handling .......................................................................................323
10.13.6 APWSUA region list....................................................................................................325
10.13.7 Safety Net Region Filtering .........................................................................................326

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1 - Example of Keyboard quick action keys ........................................................................... 18


Table 2 - Symbol And Over- Symbol ............................................................................................... 20
Table 3 – Colour Palette ................................................................................................................. 22
Table 4 - Local Data Area Read Only Fields ................................................................................... 41
Table 5 - Local Data Area Accessible Fields ................................................................................... 43
Table 6 - Track Menu Layout .......................................................................................................... 52
Table 7 - Map Menu Layout ............................................................................................................ 53
Table 8 - List Menu Layout.............................................................................................................. 54
Table 9 - Radar Menu Layout.......................................................................................................... 55
Table 10 - Configuration Menu Layout ............................................................................................ 56
Table 11 - Planner Menu Layout ..................................................................................................... 58
Table 12 - Executive Menu Layout .................................................................................................. 60
Table 13 - Flight Data Menu Layout ................................................................................................ 63

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 6 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Table 14 - Supervisor Menu Layout ................................................................................................ 65


Table 15 - Label Fields Descriptions ............................................................................................... 81
Table 16 - Label Fields Interactions ................................................................................................ 82
Table 17– List Menu Layout .......................................................................................................... 116
Table 18– Radar Menu Layout ...................................................................................................... 117
Table 19 - Configuration Menu Layout .......................................................................................... 120
Table 20 - Planner Menu Layout ................................................................................................... 135
Table 21 - Executive Menu Layout ................................................................................................ 163
Table 22 - Flight Data Menu Layout .............................................................................................. 180
Table 23 - CPDLC Menu Layout ................................................................................................... 212
Table 24 - Supervisor Menu Layout .............................................................................................. 232
Table 25 SDMA Layout ................................................................................................................. 244

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1 - Lines Thickness Example ............................................................................................... 23


Figure 2 - Preview Window ............................................................................................................. 27
Figure 3 - Choice Window ............................................................................................................... 28
Figure 4 - Air Flight States .............................................................................................................. 31
Figure 5 – General Radar Picture ................................................................................................... 35
Figure 6 - Secondary Radar Picture ................................................................................................ 36
Figure 7 - GRP panning cursor shape ............................................................................................. 37
Figure 8 - Range and Bearing cursors ............................................................................................ 39
Figure 9 – Local Data Area Toolbar ................................................................................................ 40
Figure 10 - SLC .............................................................................................................................. 43
Figure 11 - Latitudinal and longitudinal values ................................................................................ 44
Figure 12 - Range Selection Menu .................................................................................................. 45
Figure 13 - RNG Button .................................................................................................................. 45
Figure 14 - Range mark values ....................................................................................................... 46
Figure 15 - CEN Button ................................................................................................................... 46
Figure 16 - OFC pointer shape........................................................................................................ 47
Figure 17 - UND Button................................................................................................................... 47
Figure 18 - NSL Button ................................................................................................................... 48
Figure 19 - AIS Button .................................................................................................................... 48
Figure 20 - PEN Button ................................................................................................................... 49
Figure 21 - Main Menu Area ........................................................................................................... 50

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 7 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 22 - Track Menu ................................................................................................................... 50


Figure 23 - List Menu ...................................................................................................................... 54
Figure 24 - Radar Menu .................................................................................................................. 55
Figure 25 - Configuration Menu....................................................................................................... 55
Figure 26 - PLANNER Menu and Sub Menu ................................................................................... 57
Figure 27 - Executive Menu ............................................................................................................ 59
Figure 28 - FLIGHTDATA Menu ...................................................................................................... 61
Figure 29 - CPDLC Menu and submenu ......................................................................................... 63
Figure 30 - SUPERVISOR Menu and Spv Map Submenu............................................................... 64
Figure 31 - Create Block Code preview window .............................................................................. 68
Figure 32 - Mode-S switch button ................................................................................................... 70
Figure 33 - Distance to go button .................................................................................................... 71
Figure 34 - QNH label ..................................................................................................................... 71
Figure 35 - QNH input ..................................................................................................................... 72
Figure 36 - Airport Selection for QNH input ..................................................................................... 72
Figure 37 - Airport Selection ........................................................................................................... 72
Figure 38 - Airport Selection ........................................................................................................... 73
Figure 39 - Slda/Tlda/Flda Tool Bar ................................................................................................ 73
Figure 40 - Correlated Track Elements ........................................................................................... 74
Figure 41 - Uncorrelated Track ....................................................................................................... 76
Figure 42 - Uncorrelated track inside a loaded map volume ............................................................ 76
Figure 43 - Nearby Track ................................................................................................................ 76
Figure 44 - Nearby Track ................................................................................................................ 76
Figure 45 - Controlled Track ........................................................................................................... 77
Figure 46 - Controlled Track Departure on APP and TWR .............................................................. 77
Figure 47 - Controlled Track Arrival on APP and TWR.................................................................... 78
Figure 48 - Ais Track ....................................................................................................................... 78
Figure 49 - Handover Sending Track .............................................................................................. 79
Figure 50 - Handover Receiving Track ............................................................................................ 79
Figure 51 - Main Menu Area ........................................................................................................... 86
Figure 52 - Track Menu layout ........................................................................................................ 86
Figure 53 - Label size selection choice window ............................................................................... 87
Figure 54 - Label selection choice window ...................................................................................... 87
Figure 55 - Orientation menu .......................................................................................................... 91
Figure 56 - Map Menu Layout ......................................................................................................... 94
Figure 58 - Get Point Information example ...................................................................................... 95

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 8 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 57 - Get Point Information cursor ......................................................................................... 95


Figure 59 - Gpi Presentation On Apw Area ..................................................................................... 96
Figure 60 - MAP EDIT NAME window ............................................................................................. 97
Figure 61 - DRAW APW/SUA window............................................................................................. 97
Figure 62 - Example of APW/SUA map........................................................................................... 98
Figure 63 - LMG – Color Maps menu .............................................................................................. 99
Figure 64 - Local Maps menu........................................................................................................ 100
Figure 65 - Draw Symbol preview window .................................................................................... 101
Figure 66 - Draw Symbol – Symbol menu ..................................................................................... 102
Figure 67 - Draw Symbol – Size menu .......................................................................................... 102
Figure 68 - Draw Broken preview window ..................................................................................... 104
Figure 69 - Draw Broken – Style menu ......................................................................................... 104
Figure 70 - Draw Broken – Width menu ........................................................................................ 104
Figure 71 - Draw Broken – Symbol menu ..................................................................................... 105
Figure 72 - Draw Broken preview window ..................................................................................... 107
Figure 73 - Draw Arc preview window ........................................................................................... 108
Figure 74 - Draw Arc and Circle – Direction menu ........................................................................ 109
Figure 75 - Draw Circle preview window ....................................................................................... 110
Figure 76 - Draw Text preview window ......................................................................................... 112
Figure 77 - Draw Text – Size menu ............................................................................................... 112
Figure 78 - GRP maps menu ........................................................................................................ 115
Figure 79 - Inter-console Mark Menu ............................................................................................ 117
Figure 80 - Pointer shapes ............................................................................................................ 118
Figure 81 - Message preview window ........................................................................................... 120
Figure 82 - Suite Text preview window .......................................................................................... 121
Figure 83 - Inter-console Message preview window ...................................................................... 122
Figure 84 - Memo window ............................................................................................................. 123
Figure 85 - Load Local Setting choice ........................................................................................... 124
Figure 86 - SLOT Name ................................................................................................................ 125
Figure 87 - Store Local Setting preview window ............................................................................ 126
Figure 88 - SLS – Slot Name choice window ................................................................................ 126
Figure 89 - Delete Store Local Setting preview window................................................................. 127
Figure 90 - SLS – Slot Name choice window ................................................................................ 127
Figure 91 - LOGIN window ............................................................................................................ 129
Figure 92 - Playback Control Window ........................................................................................... 133
Figure 93 - SNET Maps menu window .......................................................................................... 134

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 9 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 94 - SNET STCA/MSAW PANEL ....................................................................................... 134


Figure 95 - Departure Clearance preview window ......................................................................... 136
Figure 96 - Departure with Re-routing preview window ................................................................. 138
Figure 97 - En Route Clearance preview window .......................................................................... 139
Figure 98 - EnRoute Clearance with Re-routing preview window .................................................. 141
Figure 99 - Change type preview window ..................................................................................... 142
Figure 100 - Arrival Clearance preview window ............................................................................ 143
Figure 101 - Arrival with Re-Routing preview window ................................................................... 144
Figure 102 - Level Assignment preview window ............................................................................ 145
Figure 103 - Level Clearance choice window ................................................................................ 147
Figure 104 - ACCEPT/REJECT level ............................................................................................ 148
Figure 105 - Coordinate Out preview window................................................................................ 149
Figure 106 - Phone Coordination preview window ........................................................................ 151
Figure 107 - Holding Insert preview window .................................................................................. 152
Figure 108 - Holding cancel preview window ................................................................................ 153
Figure 109 - Holding Exit preview window ..................................................................................... 154
Figure 110 - Parking Bay preview window .................................................................................... 157
Figure 111 - CTOT window ........................................................................................................... 158
Figure 112 - Edit Function route .................................................................................................... 162
Figure 113 - TOF Choice .............................................................................................................. 165
Figure 114 - MISSED APPROACH window .................................................................................. 167
Figure 115 - Report order submenu .............................................................................................. 167
Figure 116 - Take Off Report window............................................................................................ 168
Figure 117 - Report Preview window............................................................................................. 169
Figure 118 - Landing Report Preview window ............................................................................... 170
Figure 119 - Estimate Revision preview window ........................................................................... 171
Figure 120 - Change SID choice ................................................................................................... 172
Figure 121- Change STAR choice ................................................................................................ 173
Figure 122 - Last Vacated Level preview window.......................................................................... 174
Figure 123 - GPW selection of RWY ............................................................................................. 175
Figure 124 - Example of RUNWAY ............................................................................................... 176
Figure 125 - Setting Menu............................................................................................................. 177
Figure 126 - Maps Menu ............................................................................................................... 177
Figure 127 - Line ........................................................................................................................... 177
Figure 128 - QNH Assignment preview window ............................................................................ 178
Figure 129 - QNH Selection preview window ................................................................................ 178

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 10 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 130 - Data Flight Insert preview window ............................................................................. 181


Figure 131 - Data Flight Amend preview window .......................................................................... 183
Figure 132 - Cancellation submenu .............................................................................................. 185
Figure 133 - FPL Cancel confirm button........................................................................................ 185
Figure 134 - Terminated Copy window.......................................................................................... 186
Figure 135 - Free Text preview window ........................................................................................ 190
Figure 136 - SSR Code Assignment preview window ................................................................... 191
Figure 137 - SSR Code submenu ................................................................................................. 192
Figure 138 - MODE S EQUIP submenu ........................................................................................ 193
Figure 139 - 8 33 submenu ........................................................................................................... 193
Figure 140 - RVSM submenu ........................................................................................................ 194
Figure 141 - BRNAV submenu ...................................................................................................... 194
Figure 142 - Amendment ICAO preview window ........................................................................... 195
Figure 143 - Predicted Trajectory (example .................................................................................. 196
Figure 144 - VAW window............................................................................................................. 198
Figure 145 - Fast Flight Plan preview window ............................................................................... 200
Figure 146 - FPL ICAO Insert........................................................................................................ 202
Figure 147 - Browse Passive Flight List order preview window ..................................................... 203
Figure 148 - Passive Flight Plan Cancel preview window.............................................................. 204
Figure 149 - Inactive Flight Amend preview window ...................................................................... 205
Figure 150 - Registration number preview .................................................................................... 207
Figure 151 - Identification Flight Plan preview window .................................................................. 208
Figure 152 - Fast Identify preview window .................................................................................... 209
Figure 153 - CPDLC connection ................................................................................................... 213
Figure 154 - CPDLC disconnection ............................................................................................... 213
Figure 155 - MIKE ......................................................................................................................... 214
Figure 156 - CPDLC ORDERS ..................................................................................................... 215
Figure 157 - CPDLC Orders Level ................................................................................................ 215
Figure 158 - CPDLC ORDERS/LEVEL/MAINTAIN........................................................................ 216
Figure 159 - DL Flight List ............................................................................................................. 216
Figure 161 - WHEN ABLE PROCEED DIRECT TO [position] ....................................................... 220
Figure 160 - CPDLC Orders Route / Offset ................................................................................... 220
Figure 162 - CPDLC Orders Crossing / Speed.............................................................................. 222
Figure 163 - CROSS [position] at [time] ........................................................................................ 223
Figure 165 - CONTACT [unit name] [frequency] ........................................................................... 225
Figure 164 - CPDLC Orders Contact / Sys Mng ............................................................................ 225

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 11 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 166 - NDA .......................................................................................................................... 229


Figure 168 - History Window ......................................................................................................... 230
Figure 167 - History Message ....................................................................................................... 230
Figure 169 - Sector Configuration preview window ....................................................................... 232
Figure 170 - Logical ATS Function Assignment preview window ................................................... 233
Figure 171 - Logical CWP Monitoring preview window .................................................................. 235
Figure 172 - Send Supervisor Message preview window .............................................................. 236
Figure 173 - Set Privilege preview window .................................................................................... 237
Figure 174 - Modify Password preview window ............................................................................. 238
Figure 175 - Supervisor Map Sending preview window ................................................................. 239
Figure 176 - Supervisor Broadcast Map preview window .............................................................. 240
Figure 177 - LOGIN DATA window ............................................................................................... 240
Figure 178 - Runway List .............................................................................................................. 241
Figure 179 - Change Runway window........................................................................................... 242
Figure 180 - SDMA window .......................................................................................................... 244
Figure 181 - ODA Layout .............................................................................................................. 245
Figure 182 - ODA window ............................................................................................................. 246
Figure 183 - Diagnostic List .......................................................................................................... 246
Figure 184 - Arrival List ................................................................................................................. 251
Figure 185 - Departure List ........................................................................................................... 253
Figure 186 - Flight Directory List ................................................................................................... 255
Figure 187 - Sector List ................................................................................................................. 259
Figure 188 - Pending List .............................................................................................................. 261
Figure 189 - Start-Up List .............................................................................................................. 263
Figure 190 - Taxi List .................................................................................................................... 265
Figure 191 - Vfr List ...................................................................................................................... 266
Figure 192 - Example Of Mode-S Directory List ............................................................................ 268
Figure 193 - Runway List .............................................................................................................. 268
Figure 194 - Holding List ............................................................................................................... 270
Figure 195 - Special Entry List ...................................................................................................... 272
Figure 196 - Coast List .................................................................................................................. 273
Figure 197– Browse List ............................................................................................................... 274
Figure 198 - Fhi Layout ................................................................................................................. 277
Figure 199 - New Fhi Layout For Extended Case.......................................................................... 278
Figure 200 - Alarm List .................................................................................................................. 280
Figure 201 - Extended Mtcd List ................................................................................................... 281

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 12 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 202 -Mtcd Reduced List ..................................................................................................... 281


Figure 203 - Flight Data Page List ................................................................................................. 283
Figure 204 - Flight Plan Message Page ........................................................................................ 284
Figure 205 - Vertical Aid Window .................................................................................................. 285
Figure 206 - Glide Path Cone Window .......................................................................................... 286
Figure 207 - CPDLC History Window ............................................................................................ 287
Figure 208 - DL Flight List (example) ............................................................................................ 288
Figure 209 - Example of CPDLC Message In Window .................................................................. 290
Figure 210 - Example of CPDLC Message Out Window ............................................................... 292
Figure 211 - Electronic Strip Bay................................................................................................... 293
Figure 212 – Full Pending DEP Strip on TWR............................................................................... 293
Figure 213 – Reduced Pending DEP Strip on TWR ...................................................................... 293
Figure 214 – Full Dep Strip on TWR ............................................................................................. 294
Figure 215 – Reduced Dep Strip on TWR ..................................................................................... 294
Figure 216 – Full Pending ARR Strip on APP ............................................................................... 294
Figure 217 – Reduced Pending ARR Strip on APP ....................................................................... 294
Figure 218 – Full Arr Strip ............................................................................................................. 295
Figure 219 – Reduced Arr Strip..................................................................................................... 295
Figure 220 – Full Pending DEP Strip on APP................................................................................ 295
Figure 221 – Reduced Pending DEP Strip on APP ....................................................................... 295
Figure 222 – Full DEP Strip on APP.............................................................................................. 296
Figure 223 – Reduced DEP Strip on APP ..................................................................................... 296
Figure 224 – Full Pending DEP Strip on APP................................................................................ 296
Figure 225 – Reduced Pending DEP Strip on APP ....................................................................... 296
Figure 226 – FullARR Strip on APP .............................................................................................. 297
Figure 227 – Reduced ARR Strip on APP ..................................................................................... 297
Figure 228 – Full Pending DEP Strip on ACC ............................................................................... 297
Figure 229 – Reduced Pending DEP Strip on ACC ....................................................................... 297
Figure 232 – Full ARR Strip on ACC ............................................................................................. 297
Figure 233 – Reduced ARR Strip on ACC .................................................................................... 298
Figure 230 – Full ARR Pending Strip on ACC ............................................................................... 298
Figure 231 – Reduced ARR Pending Strip on ACC....................................................................... 298
Figure 232 – Full ARR Strip on ACC ............................................................................................. 298
Figure 233 – Reduced ARR Strip on ACC .................................................................................... 298
Figure 234 – Full Pending ENR Strip on ACC (east-weast, south-north) ....................................... 299
Figure 235 – Full ENR Strip on ACC (east-weast, south-north) ..................................................... 299

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 13 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 236– Full Pending ENR Strip on ACC (weast-east, north-south) ........................................ 299
Figure 237 – Full ENR Strip on ACC (weast-east, north-south) ..................................................... 299
Figure 238 – Reduced ENR Strip on ACC (east-weast, south-north) ............................................ 299
Figure 239– Reduced ENR Strip on ACC (weast-east, north-south) ............................................. 300
Figure 240 – Mtcd Hmi (Conflict And Sua Infringement) On Track Label ...................................... 309
Figure 241 - Mtcd Hmi On Flight Leg, Conflict Detection ............................................................... 310
Figure 242 – Mtcd Hmi On Flight Leg, Sua Infringement Detection ............................................... 310
Figure 243 - MTCD List ................................................................................................................. 311
Figure 244 - Mtcd Hmi On Vaw ..................................................................................................... 312
Figure 245 - Mtcd Hmi (Conflict Detected) After A Probe On A Flight Plan Trajectory ................... 313
Figure 246 – CFL with try function ................................................................................................ 314
Figure 247 – DCT with try function ................................................................................................ 315
Figure 248 - ETO with try function ................................................................................................. 315
Figure 249 – Transitions from Mode-S Airspace to Not Mode-S Airspace and viceversa .............. 318
Figure 250 - Uncorrelated Track ................................................................................................... 319
Figure 251 - Controlled Track........................................................................................................ 320
Figure 252 - MSAW Region List .................................................................................................... 323
Figure 253 - MSAW Property Editor .............................................................................................. 324
Figure 254 - APWSUA region list .................................................................................................. 325

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 14 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.1 IDENTIFICATION

Product: Controller Working Position

Product Code: CWP

Program: New Vietnam Hanoi ACC

Contract Identification Code: 01/2013/VATM-SELEX ES

1.2 System Overview


The CWP is the key element of the Human Computer Interface (HCI) in the Air Traffic Control
(ATC) operational environment, and meets the operational requirements of a Sector Suite as well
as those of a single position.
The CWP is used for executive as well as planning functions in APP center while the SWP is used
to assure the control on Tower positions.
The CWP/SWP is basically intended to be manned by one controller (or assistant); for this
purpose, it is characterized by a unique set of input devices, which interacts with the graphics
display.
The CWP/SWP is a building block that can provide a complete function in an autonomous manner,
and is configurable and sizeable.
The CWP/SWP is based on the Selex ES Open System.

1.3 Document Overview


Scope of the present document is the definition of the main graphical object displayed on Controller
Working Position.
The document consists of a main part:
Controller Working Position layout addressed to Approach and Air Positions.
Controller Working Position layout addressed to Ground and Tower Positions.

The composition of the document is:


Section 1: Overview of this document.
Section 2: Provides a list of documents which are referenced within this document.
Section 3: Identifies the specific HMI element presented on the Control Working Position.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 15 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

2 DOCUMENTS

2.1 Reference Document

Ref. Identification Title


CS0100005301RS02 User Requirements for VATM Project
R1.
Issue 01.00
C13004 03-1019SWCD Software Customization Document for Vietnam Project
R2.
issue 03.00
E100-01-1186TN issue GLOSSARY FOR ATM DOMAIN
R3.
01.00

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 16 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

3 I/O DEVICES
The display of a CWP Unit consists of a graphics system, one set of input devices and one set of
output devices. The graphics system manages hardware/software graphics resources to render
graphics services to the CWP computer.

3.1 Input Devices


The set of input devices include:
 Pointing device (mouse)
 Alphanumeric/functional Keyboard
The above mentioned devices allow the ATCO to perform the following operations:
 Enter ATC orders
 interact with HMI elements (e.g. windows, lists, radar windows, electronic strips)

3.1.1 Pointing Device


The pointing device is a mouse and provides the following input possibilities:
 To move the cursor on the screen;
 To enter window management and ATC "application dependent" orders.
The pointing device has three buttons which are allocated as follows:
 Action Button (AB): is used to initiate system dialogue, to input new values into the system
and to move windows on the screen.
 Information Button (IB): is used to display additional information either textually or graphically
(this information display could be either permanent or temporary) and to minimize/maximize
windows on the screen.
 Window Management Button (WB): is used for window management applications.
The CWP/SWP is fully customizable in terms of interaction of the HMI elements by means of the
pointing device. The functionality of each on a defined HMI object is clearly defined in the following
chapters of the current document.

3.1.2 Keyboard
The keyboard provides the following input possibilities:
 to enter data, by means of the alphanumeric keys;
 activate orders by means of off-line defined keyboard shortcut keys

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 17 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

3.1.2.1 Quick Action Keys


The CWP/SWP allows the ATCO to quickly execute an order or open an HMI object by means of an
off-line configured “action keys”. On the following g there is an example of keys and the associated
actions:

Keyboard Key Action


F1 Toggle ESB on APP or ACC position, ref.
F2 Fast Flight Plan, ref. 10.5.8.16 Fast Flight Plan – FFP
F5 Label line selection (2 lines), ref. 10.5.1.2 Label Lines Selection – LAB
F6 Label line selection (3 lines), ref. 10.5.1.2 Label Lines Selection – LAB
F7 Label line selection (4 lines), ref. 10.5.1.2 Label Lines Selection – LAB
F8 CTRL sector identifier
F9 Open/close the SECTOR LIST, ref. 10.7.4
F10 Open/close the MODE-S LIST, ref. 10.7.9
F11 Open/close the DEP LIST, ref. 10.7.2
F12 Open/close the ARR LIST, ref. 10.7.1
Print Scrn Increase GRP range scale +10 NM
Pause Decrease GRP range scale -10 NM

Table 1 - Example of Keyboard quick action keys

3.2 Output Devices


The set of output devices include:
 Screen(s)
 Strip Printer(s)

3.2.1 Screen(s)
A screen is the physical surface on which data is displayed within windows. It is a pixel addressable
"raster scan" type screen with high graphic resolution and colour capabilities to correctly display the
HMI item and display text in legible way. The CWP/SWP is off-line configurable to use the following
monitor hardware configuration:
 2K x 2K
 1K x 1K
 Double/Triple screen presentation

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 18 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

3.2.1.1.1 Screen(s) Configuration


 The Screen Configuration for Vietnam Hanoi project will be the following:

3.2.2 Strip Printer(s)


 CWP is connectes to a Strip Printer to SERIAL port for automatic or manual STRIP printing.
Refer to 10.8 for other informations.

4 HMI GENERIC CHARACTERISTICS

4.1 Symbol And Characters


On the CWP/SWP more fonts can coexist simultaneously in the presentation; the geometrical
characteristics of each font can be changed; changes refer also to the type of characters: the
character sets supported on the CWP are those belonging to the "X Consortium Standard Character
Set Group".
All the changes referring to the fonts can be executed by modifying resource file.

Symbol Description Symbol Description

Cursor pointer Local primary tracks

Menu cursor pointer Local secondary tracks

OFC order pointer Local combined tracks

GPI modality pointer Navigated track

Lat&Long order pointer Final coast track

COR order pointer


R&Bi order pointer ◊ Flight Plan track

R&Bi origin Aerodrome

ICM order pointer Compulsory reporting point

DRAW order pointer


Reporting point
Drag Track label order pointer
Interconso Track with duplicate non

le mark discrete SSR code

◊ Primary plot BYP

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 19 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Symbol Description Symbol Description

Secondary plot Locator

Combined plot TACAN

Block code selected track


▬ VOR
Block code selected plot

Primary system track VORTAC

Secondary system track DME

Combined system track texture rain level 1

Secondary system track with


texture rain level 4
Mode S contribution
Combined system track with
texture rain level 5
Mode S contribution

Track History Trail texture rain level 6

Track selected with altitude SPI (Special Position


filter Indicator)

Hooked track ADS-B track

Table 2 - Symbol And Over- Symbol

4.2 Colours
Different Colours are used on the CWP to:
 code the status of the flight (e.g., a flight has been coordinated, accepted, assumed or
transferred);
 display video maps and code the background for windows and text;
 draw attention to emergency and/or critical situations;
 identify outstanding actions;
 improve legibility and perception.
Blinking colours are allowed. They are obtained through a temporised switch between two colors. As
static colours, they are associated with an index, referenced in the application.
The sum of the depth of the colour maps belonging to each layer inside a window is 8; this mean
that 256 colours can be displayed simultaneously inside a window.
The colours are listed in Errore. L'origine riferimento non è stata trovata.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 20 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Object Name R G B Colour Appearance


GRP Background 130 130 130
Lists Background /Scrolling slide lists 121 121 121
LDA,SDA background 103 110 130
Alarms in RDP Alarm List 256 70 70
Warning in RDP Alarm List 256 70 70
Pushed Button 68 68 68
Top Shadow color 207 212 230
Bottom Shadow color 0 0 0
List Label Foreground color 237 205 110
Button Foreground color 242 251 251
Foreground list color 200 200 200
Controlled Tracks 0 255 0
Tentative/Handover Receiving 255 0 255
Handover Sending 0 235 255
Uncorrelated Tracks 149 149 149
Nearby Uncontrolled tracks 149 149 149
Plot presentation 98 177 100
Advanced Information Tracks 256 191 170
Notified Tracks 194 214 155
Highlight top shadow 166 166 166
Highlight bottom shadow 60 60 60
Hook on lists 110 89 56
Hook on track and strip 255 255 255
Tracks Speed Vector 211 170 110
Geo cursors (R&B1) 255 255 0
Geo cursors (R&B2) 0 255 0
Geo cursors (R&B3) 0 235 255
Geo cursors (R&B4) 255 165 0
Geo cursors (R&B5) 255 255 255
Geo cursors (R&B6) 255 0 0
Geo cursors (R&B7) 0 0 255
Geo cursors (R&B8) 255 0 255
Trajectory Cursors 1 0 239 0

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 21 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Trajectory Cursors 2 0 255 255


Trajectory Cursors 2 255 192 203
Coordination IN Color 255 0 255
Coordination OUT Color 0 255 255
MTCD Aircraft to aircraft encounter 255 0 0
MTCD Risk A 255 255 0
MTCD Risk B 96 154 216
MTCD Aircraft to airspace encounter 255 165 0
Not OK (PHO, RJC, LRM) 153 102 0
Alarms(TCA) 255 0 0
Warnings (deviations) 255 165 0
Maps objects R G B Color Appearance
Own Sectors 70 70 70
Other adjacent sectors 130 130 130
Airways Centrelines 54 54 54
Airways Corridors 160 160 160
STCA Maps 110 89 84
MSAW Maps 170 188 225
APW Maps 110 89 84
Meteo Maps 59 209 100
Navigation points, text 54 54 54

Table 3 – Colour Palette

4.3 Layering
Information displayed inside each window are displayed in layers.Each layer has its own priority and
its own colour map.
In the case of the GRP, SRP, TRP and FRP the following layering subdivision is applied:
 A first layer is used for the presentation of fixed background maps.
 A second layer is for the presentation of dynamic maps, such as routes, and meteo maps.
 A third layer is for the presentation of moving objects, such as tracks and plots.
Layers and related colour maps can be defined through resource file.

4.3.1 Objects Priority


Each class of objects in the presentation has its own priority.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 22 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The priority control is achieved:


 by assigning to each class of objects represented inside each layer a priority value.
 by changing priority of a layer

4.4 Lines
Various types of lines of different thickness (solid, dashed, dotted, dot-dash, long dash) are
provided.
Line style, colour and thickness can be changed by editing resource files.
The following lines of different thickness are provided:

Figure 1 - Lines Thickness Example

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 23 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

5 USER ADMINISTRATION

5.1 User Login and Logout


ATCO is able to have access to the CWP capability by means of login procedure(user name and
password). If the Username or password is wrong a dedicated error message will be displayed on
the LOGIN mask (please refer to LOGIN order).
The password related to each user will be maintained encrypted in the account definition in order to
assure a high level of security.
Automatic logout are defined whenever:
 A new login will be performed on an already enabled position;
 An already logged user will try to perform the login on a different position;
All the login\logout action will be recorded in order to allow investigation related the access to the
System.
The creation, modification or cancellation of a user profile will be performed by a dedicated LDAP
Client position by a user having Supervisor privileges.

5.2 User HMI Settings


At the Start up, the CWP will present a default setting configuration and will assume the Watcher
role, the ATCO is enabled to issue only presentation orders (e.g. range scale change, off-centre,
speed vector) but all the Flight orders will be inhibited until the first login is performed.
At the user logout the loaded setting will be maintained but all the user profile linked capabilities will
be inhibited.
During the definition of the Local Setting the ATCO is able to select the preferred filters application,
centre and range scale.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 24 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

6 WINDOWS

6.1 Windows Composition

6.1.1 Window components and attributes


A window is a restricted area on the screen .The imaginary contour of this area is the frame; it does
not have graphical attributes. The image is constituted by the visual representations (graphical or
textual) displayed inside a window. The background is the area of a window, which is not covered by
visual representations. The window background can be opaque or transparent.
Other components (such as the border, title, buttons, scales, scroll bars,) are available to meet
particular needs. Only a subset of these components is generally used in a window: this subset will
include the components effectively required for the particular function of the window.
The window contains also a warning sub area where an error message is displayed if the entered
data are wrong; the ATCO can correct the wrong field(s) and terminate the new input sequence.
All the components are inside the area enclosed by the frame.
Colour and graphical attributes of a window are the colour and graphical attributes of its
components; they are specified for the different cases.
The ATCO is enabled to print to print a window and its content by means of the print function.
Actions:
 OPEN (or CALL):
To open (or call) a window makes it appear. It could be called automatically as a result of
internal system events or as a result of a manual action by an ATCO.
o Open an iconized window:
▪ CLICK with MB on the icon of the window
o Open a not iconized window:
▪ Enter the specific input sequence.
 CLOSE:
To close a window makes it disappear. This is done manually by an ATCO action, or by the
system following particular sequences of events.
o Close not iconizable window:
▪ Enter the specific input sequence.
 ICONIZE:
To iconize is to reduce the displayed aspect of a window to a small pictorial representation
(icon).
o iconize a not closable window:
▪ CLICK with MB inside the window
o iconize a closable window:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 25 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

▪ input sequence: CLICK with MB on the title area of the window (a closable window
without title is not iconizable)
The icons are positioned on the right vertical side of the screen. The icons lay over other
windows.
 MOVE:
To move a window is a manual action by the ATCO to place it elsewhere on the screen.
o P&H DRAG with LB on the window title. Drag the outline of the window to the new
position and release the button. The window will be displayed in the new position.
During the move action the frame of the window remains visible on the HMI.
 RE-SIZE:
To re-size a window is to change the height and/or width of the window, i.e. to increase (or
decrease) the space occupied by the window on the screen.
o Height & width re-size:
▪ P&H DRAG with LB or MB on a corner of the window
o Height or width re-size:
▪ P&H DRAG with LB or MB on a side of the window
Drag the window outline until it gets the required dimensions then release the button. The
window will assume the new size.
By positioning the cursor on one of the sides or corners of a window, the shape of the window
changes, to indicate that it is possible to activate the re-size action.
 FOCUS:
o When a window is selected to be ready to receive inputs from the ATCO, it is called
"focused".
o Different focusing policy can be adopted: particularly an auto-focus mechanism can
be provided in which case the window is focused when the cursor superimposes it.
The focused state of a window is recognized by the change of the graphical shape of
the window's border or, if the window is without the border, by a visible contour in
correspondence of the frame.
 SWAP:
o To swap is to invert the display priority between two or more windows (i.e. move one
in front of the other; certain windows has a higher priority than others).
The system shall provide a mechanism whereby windows/data critical to the control function cannot
be closed or obstructed.

6.1.2 Window types


The Windows displayed on the SWP may be opaque or transparent, and may contain various types
of information (e.g., radar data, tabular messages, time).
An opaque window is composed of the following elements:
 A frame;
 An opaque background;

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 26 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

 The image;
 Scroll buttons.
A transparent window is composed of the following elements:
 A frame;
 A “close button”;
 Scroll buttons;
 A move button;
 A transparent background;
 Data lines;
 A join button.

6.1.3 Operational Windows


The following operational windows are displayed on the CWP:
 Radar windows (“main” and “additional”)
 Menu Windows
 Main Menu Area
 System Configuration Windows
 Order Masks
 Choice Windows
 Lists and Tables
 Electronic Strip Bay.
A scroll bar is characterised by scroll arrows, empty spaces and a slider.

6.2 Preview Window


A preview window is a dialogue box containing input boxes, buttons and information boxes. It is
used to insert orders supported by data (data values are set filling the input boxes foreseen for each
mask).

Figure 2 - Preview Window

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 27 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

When the entry is related secure data (e.g. password) in the window the entry value is not visualized
but the feedback is provided during the input (e.g. by display of ****).

6.3 Choice Window


A choice window allows the inputting of homogeneous, “alphanumeric discrete” data chosen among
a predefined set.
It can be used to input an order into the system or to provide values for an input mask.
It is opened through a proper sequence of orders, and is automatically closed after the choice.
The current value for the field, if any, can be used as default and displayed in reverse video at the
centre of the choice window.

Figure 3 - Choice Window

6.4 Tabular Window


Table windows are used to display tabular data. They can be “Additional” or part of a “Preferential”
window. Tabular windows automatically re-sized up to a defined maximum size, to fit exactly the
data contained in them.
They can be iconized and can be composed by one or more of the following elements:
o A frame, a close button, an iconize button and scroll buttons (up/down)
o Amove button: to move the table inside the GRP, locate the pointer on the title and
click LB; subsequently, move the table in the new position and click LB;
o Abackground, which is transparent;
o Data lines (system parameter, predefined for each table window) that can be scrolled
up and down or buttons;
o Join button: only for FIX and HLD lists

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 28 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

7 PROCESSING PROCEDURES

7.1 PROCESSING ENVIRONMENTS


The following processing environments are provided within the ATC Centre:

 On line (ONL):
The ONL processing environment provides ATM services to the operational positions; these
services are based on the real (on line) traffic situation.

 Playback (PLB):
The PLB processing environment provides playback services; these are based on a recorded
real traffic situation.

 Simulator Processor (SIM)


The SIM processing environment provides training services based on a simulated traffic
situation.

7.2 Air Atco Functions (CWP)


In a control sector suite the PLN and EXE are provided with various data services and functions
essential to the provision of an expeditious ATC service.
The EXE and the PLN are provided with identical functionality, which will enable a flexible
distribution of tasks dependent on role and traffic conditions. However, the basic principles for the
partitioning of the task are as follows:

7.2.1 Planning (PLN) Function


The PLN function is related to establishing a safe transit plan through the sector by ensuring no
severe conflicts will occur at the entry, exit, or (where predictable) during the transit of the sector.
The PLN function is necessary to ensure that the traffic entering and leaving the sector does so with
the maximum safety and minimum problems for the executive function.
The PLN function may also identify potential conflicts at some stage within the sector and may be
able to affect an early resolution of the conflicts, without resorting to tactical resolution.
The PLN function when active is visible on the SDA and the Executive menu in the LDA is disabled

7.2.2 Executive (EXE) Function


The EXE function is related to communication with the pilots and the passing of instructions to
achieve the basic sector transit plan; it also includes the tactical resolution of any problems that
have been "flagged" at the planning stage, or which arise due to unpredicted behaviour of a flight.
The EXE achieves the planning strategy for the sector, and carries out tactical resolutions of
conflicts by altering the profiles of the appropriate flight.
Due to the fact that the PLN function and the EXE functions are identical, two additional elements
are to be considered to make them possible:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 29 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

 Co-ordination:
 Co-ordination within one ATC Centre, i.e., between the controllers of two adjacent sectors
(e.g., transfer of control or planning co-ordination)
 Co-ordination between ATC Centres, i.e., between the controllers of two adjacent sectors
of two adjacent ATC Centres (e.g., transfer of control or planning co-ordination via OLDI
messages)
 Communication with pilots (e.g., requests and reports from pilots, control instructions to
pilots).
The EXE function when active is visible on the SDA and the PLANNER MENU in the LDA is
disabled.

7.2.3 Executive and Planner (EXP) Function


The EXP function is the sum of EXE function and PLB Function, therefore EXP function has all the
capability.

7.2.4 Watcher (WTC) Function


The WTC function is automatically assigned to the releasing logical CWP when this remains with no
ATS function(s) assigned. The WTC function can be manually assigned only if at least in a sector is
present the EXP function.

8 SURVEILLANCE MANAGEMENT

8.1 Radar data presentation


The CWP is able to present the radar data in different operative condition.
SSR plots are generated by their radar extractor at the rate of the antenna rotation period, and
transmitted to the TRH (Tracking Radar Head) system(one RHP system is used for each radar
head);this performs combining of SSR plots and Single Radar Tracking (SRT), generating local
tracks.
Each TRH system transmits local tracks and plots to the MSFsystem;; it performs Multi Radar
Tracking (MRT) and generates MRT tracks, with scanning time generally selected between 4 and 10
seconds for air tracks (system parameter); for ground tracks the scanning time is around 1s.
MRT tracks are referred as "system tracks".
The Radar Data Processing system transmits plots, local tracks and system tracks to CWPs and
other processing systems through the ATC LAN.
Plots and local tracks from the RDP system are called "bypass" radar data.

8.2 Radar data presentation in Rdp


In RDP status the CWP displays the “system tracks” as defined and described in§ 10.3. The CWP
will display this status on SDMA with the string ‘RDP’ as described in§10.6.1.
.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 30 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

8.3 Radar data presentation in Dard


A CWP is able to directly receive and distribute radar dataand ADS-B (plots and local tracks) from
one or more RHP system(s) through the DARD LAN; this feature is called DARD: Direct Access
Radar Data.
When the ATC Centre is switched to the DARD DegradedMode(ref. DRS order), each CWP in ONL
modewill transmit radar data directly received from its DARD connections(if provided) to the other
CWPs, including itself, through the DARDLAN.The operational status of the ATC centre ‘DARD’ is
shown in the SDMA.
In this operational status, each CWP assume the role of a DARD disseminator.
Each radar head can be directly, through the RFESub-System, connected to one or more CWPs. In
case several CWPs receive data from the same radar, one of them is automatically selected as
DARD disseminator.
The DARD disseminator can be off-line configured(ref. DSC order) as well as disabled (ref. DSD
order)
When in DARD mode, each CWP displays DARD data relevant to the locally selected radar head
(ref. RDS order). A CWP can display DARD data of any selected radar head.

9 FLIGHT PLAN STATES

9.1 Air Flight Plan States

Figure 4 - Air Flight States

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 31 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

 INACTIVE (or PASSIVE) flight state:


o When a new system flight plan (SFPL) is entered into the FDPS (received from the
AFTN or entered by the FFP - Flight Fast Plan) it assumes the state "inactive".
 Processing of inactive flights includes:
 route analysis,
 ETD or ETI calculation.
An inactive flight can be modified by the messages received from the AFTN or orders entered by the
FFP operators.
 Output of inactive flight data:
 Inactive flights are displayable on request to the FFP operators.
o
 PENDING (or PRE-ACTIVE) flight state:
Flight pre-activation:
 An inactive flight departing from an airport inside the FIR becomes "pending" a predefined
time (system parameter, 5 to 60 minutes, typically 20 minutes) before ETD (automatic
pre-activation).
 The departure airport can be controlled by the TWR and APP Units.
 Electronic Flight Strip containing SFPL data can be available at configurable pre-defined
time parameter prior activation.
A SFPL can be entered by an ATCO from CWP; it immediately assumes the state "pending".
 Processing of pending flights:
 Insertion of the default SID And/Or STAR into the route,
 Route Analysis,
 Trajectory Calculation,
 Sectors Determination,
 Transmission of Flight Data to the SWPs (with the proposed SSR Code).

 ACTIVE (or CLEARED) flight state:


Flight activation (clearance):

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 32 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

 Flight departing from an airport


 A pending flight departing from an airport inside the FIR becomes "active" after manual
insertion of the "clearance".
 Processing of active flights:
Processing of an active flight is performed immediately after the activation and after a re-
clearance order (see in the following), and includes:
 Insertion of the current SID and/or STAR into the route,
 Assignment of the SSR code,
 New route analysis,
 Trajectory calculation,
 Sector(s) determination,
 New transmission of flight data to the CWPs,
 SFPLs and radar tracks correlation (based on the SSR code),
 Activation of the MTCD processing.

 Output of active flight data:


 Data related to active flights in the controlled airspace are displayed as flight lists and
electronic strips in the suite SWPs of the sectors to be flown.
 Modification of active flights (re-clearance):
 An active flight can be modified by a "re-clearance" order.
 Active flights and radar tracks:
o In case a radar track has been correlated with an active SFPL, the track is called
"tentative". The executive ATCO responsible of the first sector is allowed to assume
the track under radar control; the track is consequently called "controlled".

 LIVE (or DYNAMIC) flight state:


 Position reports:
o In case of SFPL correlated with a radar track, the FDPS will automatically perform
position reports (i.e. take-off reports, inbound reports, position reports over fixes
inside the FIR), as well as other flight progress updates, by processing the radar
tracks received from the RDPS for that flight. In case of absence of radar track for a
given SFPL, position reports and other flight progress updating orders can be
manually entered by the ATCO currently responsible of the flight, when it is activated.
o A flight becomes "live" after the first position report (take-off or inbound report).
 Processing of live flights:
o Processing of live flights is performed after a position report or other flight progress
updating order (e.g. holding), and includes:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 33 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

 new route analysis (after a re-routing order),


 trajectory re-calculation,
 sector(s) determination (after a re-routing order),
 transmission of upgraded flight data to the SWPs,
 deviation alert service,
 MTCD processing.
 Output of live flight data:
 Data related to live flights are transmitted to the SWPs in order to be displayed as flight
lists and electronic strips.
 Data related to a certain live flight are displayed to the SWPs managing the sectors
interested to the flight route.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 34 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10 HMI DESCRIPTION FOR CWP

10.1 Radar Pictures


The radar pictures are the windows in which the conceptual objects belonging to Traffic data, Airport
data and Weather data are displayed. The maximum number of radar pictures is four.
On the CWP are configured four radar pictures. On the SWP are configured two radar pictures.

10.1.1 General Radar Pictures


The General radar picture is shown automatically on the screen at start-up and cover the entire
screen size, is not resizable nor closable or iconizable.

Figure 5 – General Radar Picture

The actions can be performed on the “sensible zones”:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 35 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Transparent lists;
Tracks Label
Maps
The static maps and the filled maps (dynamic) have lower priority then any other objects (tracks,
plots, etc.). Static maps are the graphical objects with the lowest priority.

10.1.2 Additional Radar Pictures


The Secondary Radar Picture (SRP), Third Radar Picture (TRP) and Fourth Radar Picture (FRP)
windows are quite similar to the GRP but they do not contain transparent windows.
They are used to make a zoom of a geographic area and select SRP, TRP or FRP can be displayed
at the same time. The label, alarms, input order and management of the additional radar picture are
identical to the ones of the GRP.
These windows provide their own representation scale and they are managed by mean SLDA,
TLDA and FLDA.
They are managed by means of SLDA, TLDA and are opened or closed, clicking on the respective
button in the RADARmenu opened by clicking AB on the WRP button of the Local Data Area.
SRP, TRP and FRP can be displayed at the same time.

Figure 6 - Secondary Radar Picture

10.1.2.1.1 Propagation feature for Radar Pictures (GRP/SRP/TRP/FRP)

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 36 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

ORDERS ACTIVATION RESULT


Label highlight GRP, SRP, TRP, FRP GRP, SRP, TRP, FRP
Label Deconflict LDA GRP/SRP/TRP/FRP
Label Drag&drop GRP/ SRP/ TRP/ FRP GRP/ SRP/ TRP/ FRP
Bypass radar selection GRP GRP/SRP/TRP/FRP

10.1.3 RADAR PICTURE MANAGEMENT


ORDERS ACTIVATION RESULT
AB click on CEN button of
CEN Default centre presentation
LDA/SLDA/TLDA/FLDA
IB click on CEN button of
LDA/SLDA/TLDA/FLDA+ AB
OFC New centre presentation
click in the GRP/SRP/TRP/FRP
area for new centre selection
AB click on UND button of
UND Undo the last Centre order
LDA/SLDA/TLDA/FLDA
Drag&Drop action by AB click
Scroll Bar on a point of New centre presentation
GRP/SRP/TRP/FRP

10.1.3.1 Panning
Objective:
Modify the centre of presentation on GRP.

Activation:
1. Press and Hold AB on the GRP; the mouse point change shape;
2. Drag the mouse pointer until the desired position is reached;
3. Release AB

Figure 7 - GRP panning cursor shape

Result:
The GRP is centred in the desired geographical position.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 37 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Parameters:
none

De-Activation:
Press LB on the CEN button of LDA to return to default centre of presentation.

10.1.3.2 Zoom
Objective:
Zoom In/Out a portion of GRP.

Activation:
1. Point the mouse cursor on a certain position of GRP;
2. Scroll the wheel of the mouse or use the RANGE selection on LDA

Result:
The GRP is zoom in/out around the chosen position.

Parameters:
none

De-Activation:
Repeat point 1. and 2. to change zoom selection.

10.1.3.3 Range and Bearing


The CWP is able to calculate and display the bearing (in magnetic degrees) and distance (in
Nautical Miles) between:
 two points,
 a point and a track,
 two tracks.

The CWP calculates the distance (i.e., the range between the two points in NM), the bearing (i.e.,
the angle from the north of the cursor origin point and the cursor line joining the two points) and the
reverse bearing (i.e., the angle from the north of the cursor end point and the cursor line joining the
two points) respect this two point.
In case of bearing and distance between a point and a track the CWP also calculates the estimated
time required to reach the point, based on the aircraft ground speed. This calculation is performed

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 38 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

only if the angle between the direction of the flight and the line connecting the track to the point is
not greater than 25 degrees.
If the beginning or the end of the cursor is a track the displayed information (bearing, reverse
bearing, distance, estimated time) are updated at every scan.
It is possible to display a maximum of 8 R&B on a radar picture.
Objective:
Display the range and bearing.

Activation:
On the general radar picture:
1. CLICK with AB and DRAG to draw the first point and the cursor axe,
2. RELEASE AB to fix the second point of the cursor.

Result:
The Range & Bearing is displayed between the selected points.

If the selected radar picture point (origin or end) is a track symbol position, the cursor is hooked to
the track and the information is updated, every scan, according to the track movements.
If both the origin and the end of the cursor are hooked to tracks, the information displayed are
referred to the two hooked tracks and are updated every new scan.

Figure 8 - Range and Bearing cursors

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 39 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.2 Radar Picture Toolbar

10.2.1 Local Data Area Toolbar


The Local Data Area (LDA) is an Input/Output window that shows the current settings of the GRP
window and allows their modification by using the “accessible fields”.
It is automatically displayed with the GRP at system start-up; it is not iconizable and not closable.

Figure 9 – Local Data Area Toolbar

VALUE DESCRIPTION FORMAT OR POSSIBLE VALUE


Number of minutes used by
◄0► A number in the range 0  15
the speed vector
Label for the High altitude
H: H:
layer of the altitude filter
Label for the Low altitude
L: L:
layer of the altitude filter
Latitude: three groups of two
numbers and letter N (or S)
Latitude and Longitude value Longitude: a group of three
40 30 50 N / 037 04 57 E of the actual position of the numbers, two group of two numbers
cursor on the GRP and letter E (or W)
Latitude and Longitude values are
separated by a / symbol
Number of history dots of a
◄7► A number in the range 0  7
track
Five groups of four characters (four
----/----/----/----/---- Block codes selected digit or some digit and some * or ----
) divided by a / symbol
hh:mm:ss System time
The username of the actual
USRN: smart Username
operator.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 40 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

VALUE DESCRIPTION FORMAT OR POSSIBLE VALUE


Tube:DD/MM/YYYY
Tube time Time since log-in at the sector
hh:mm:ss
TL Transition Level Transition Level Value

Table 4 - Local Data Area Read Only Fields

LDA ORDERS LDA FIELDS Notes


Screen Layout Exchange SLC The operator can o change the
current screen layout
Flight Plan Track Filter FPT Enable/Disable the presentation of
FPT on the GRP.
Range Scale selection RNG: It Displays the Range Menu (see
Figure 8 ). The label displays the
actual value after the characters
“RNG:”(e.g. “RNG:200”)
Predefined values of RNG The operator can to choose several
Range Scale values in Range Menu: 50, 100,
150, and 200, SAVED value (e.g.
256).
Range Scale Scroll Bar RNG The operator can to choose a
▲▼ number in the range 1 2048
Save/Range Scale SAVE This order allows to save the range
value selected by the scroll bar (see
Figure 12).
Centre order CEN Centre the map on the default
centre of presentation
Undo Centre order UND Reset the presentation of the map
at the previous displayed position
Nearby Filter NSL Filter the presentation of the track
label in Nearby status
Advanced Information AIS Filter the presentation of the track
Status Filter label in AIS status
Pending Filter PEN Filter the presentation of the track
label in Pending status
Plot Filter PLO Filter the presentation of the plot
DEP Filter DEP Filter the presentation of Departure
Strips on Approach position
ARR Filter ARR Filter the presentation of Arrival
Strips on Approach Position
TRACK Menu TRACK See 10.2.2.11.1

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 41 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

LDA ORDERS LDA FIELDS Notes


MAP Menu MAP See 10.2.2.11.2
LIST Menu LIST See10.2.2.11.3
RADAR Menu RADAR See 10.2.2.11.4
CONF Menu CONF See 10.2.2.11.5
PLAN Menu PLAN See 10.2.2.11.6
EXE Menu EXE See 10.2.2.11.7
FLIGHT Menu FLIGHT See 10.2.2.11.8
CPDLC Menu CPDLC See 10.2.2.11.9
SUP Menu SUP See 10.2.2.11.9
Speed Vectors SPV Display All Speed Vectors on all the
tracks
SPV arrows  SPV:  Time for speed vector from 0=0 min
up to 15= 15 min

History Trail HST Enable history trail presentation on
all the tracks
HST arrows HIST: Track history trail selection from 0=
0 history trail up to 9 = 9 history trail.

Altitude Filter HLO Enable altitude filter
High layer H: Define Higher layer value to be
used in the altitude filter
Low layer L: Define Lower layer value to be used
in the altitude filter
Quick Look Feature QLF Displays all the labels until the
mouse button is released bypassing
the current filters
Exclude Block codes EBC The Enter Block Code order allows
order the entering of up to five SSR block
codes to use with the DBC filter.
Display block code order DBC The Display Block Code order
enables/disables the display of the
labels with SSR codes selected by
EBC order.
Bypass Selection BYP
Mute Button MUTE The Mute Button permits to
acknowledge the audible sound
when an alarm is on.
Mode-S fields forced MODS The MODS button forces the
display presentation of the mode-s received
data on the track labels

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 42 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

LDA ORDERS LDA FIELDS Notes


Distance to go DIST TO GO The distance to go button permits to
display on the position symbol of
the arrival flights the distance
needed to reach the airport.
QNH QNH input The QNH allows the controller to
manually input the Global or Local
QNH.
AIRP AIRP selection The AIRP button allows the
controller to select the airport QNH
to be applied on the CWP.

Table 5 - Local Data Area Accessible Fields

10.2.2 Local Data Area Toolbar Management

10.2.2.1 SLC – Screen Layout Exchange


The Screen Layout Exchange allows the controller to change the current screen layout.
The SCL allows to change the layout of the current windows:
GRP
ESB
IDS
AFJ
AMAN
Clicking with the mouse on the SCREEN LAYOUT button on LDA the following preview window is
displayed:

Figure 10 - SLC

The operator is allowed to specify for each preferential window the following information, shown
through toggle buttons:
 Window on/off

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 43 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

 Window size (full/ smallfor GRP and ESB; AxB for AUX1 and AUX2)
 Window position (up or down, left or right).
 Screen where to display the windows
The IDS, AFJ and AMAN/DMAN are displayed automatically on the second screen of the CWP,
if it is configured.

10.2.2.2 Lat & Long


Activation:
Move mouse cursor on the radar picture.

Result:
The latitudinal and longitudinal values are updated on the LDA according to the position of the
mouse cursor on the radar picture.

Note:
It is available on each radar picture.

Figure 11 - Latitudinal and longitudinal values

10.2.2.3 Range Scale - RNG


Objective:
the Range Scale order selects the range of the GRP presentation.

Activation:
1. Press AB on the RNG button of LDA. The GRP RNG menu is displayed.
2. Press AB on the button with the wished predefined value (50, 100,150, 300, 450 or “custom
value previously saved”)

Result:
1. The range selection menu is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 44 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 12 - Range Selection Menu

2. The range of GRP is modified and current value is displayed in Range Scale Field of the
button RNG of LDA window.

Figure 13 - RNG Button

the range mark is updated based on the selected range as the following tables:

RANGE SCALE RANGE MARK measure 1 (NM)


1.0 1.0 nm
21.0 5.0 nm
101.0 10.0 nm
201.0 20.0 nm
301.0 30.0 nm
501.0 50.0 nm
801.0 80.0 nm
1001.0 90.0 nm

RANGE SCALE RANGE MARK measure 2 (KM)


1.0 4.0 km
21.0 8.0 km
36.0 15.0 km

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 45 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

76.0 20.0 km
101.0 30.0 km
151.0 50.0 km

Figure 14 - Range mark values

Parameters:
Range scale value.

Note:
It is possible to save a custom value in the last button of the GRP RNG menu choosing a range
scale with “scroll action” and pressing the button SAVE on the GRP RNG window. The ‘SAVED’
value will be assigned at the last button of the GRP RNG window and its label shows the current
value.

10.2.2.4 Default Centre - CEN


Objective:
The Default Centre order allows the controller to return to the default centre of the presentation, off
line configured on the map.

Activation:
Click AB on the CEN button of the LDA.

Figure 15 - CEN Button

Result:
1. The geographic presentation is re-centred.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 46 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.2.2.5 Off Centre - OFC


Objective:
The Off Centre order allows to change the centre of the radar picture by clicking with mouse in the
desired position.

Activation:
1. Click IB on the CEN button of the LDA window;
2. Move the pointer to the new centre position and LB click on the desired position.

Result:
1. The shape of the pointer symbol changes as following:

Figure 16 - OFC pointer shape

2. The radar picture is re-centred on the selected position.

De-Activation:
Click with LB on the Centre button of the GRP.

10.2.2.6 Undo Centre - UND


Objective:
The UND order allows the PLN / EXE controller to delete any previous action that has modified the
centre of GRP presentation (e.g. CEN, OFC, RNG orders, panning and zoom action).

Activation:
1. Click AB on the UND button of the LDA.

Figure 17 - UND Button


Result:
1. The last action executed on the GRP centring is deleted.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 47 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.2.2.7 Nearby Track Label Filter – NSL


Objective:
The Nearby Sectors Label order enables/disables the display of the labels owned by nearby sectors.

Activation:
1. Click LB on NSL button on the LDA menu.

Figure 18 - NSL Button

Result:
1. The nearby sectors labels are displayed or not, depending on the previous status.

De-Activation:
Click AB on NSL button again.

10.2.2.8 Ais Track Label Filter - AIS


Objective:
The AIS tracks order enables/disables displaying of the labels of the AIS tracks.

Activation:
1. Click LB on AIS button of the LDA.

Figure 19 - AIS Button

Result:
if the button was released
then the button becomes pressed and colored;
all labels relevant to AIS tracks are displayed and the AIS indication in LDA and in
SLDA is displayed colored.
else the button was pressed and:
it becomes released;
the labels relevant to AIS tracks are not displayed except those “filtered” by the:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 48 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

EHL order (if HLO is selected).

10.2.2.9 Pending Track Label Filter - PEN


Objective:
The pending tracks order enables/disables displaying of the labels of the pending tracks.

Activation:
1. Click LB on PEN button of the LDA.

Figure 20 - PEN Button

Result:
if the button was released
then the button becomes pressed and colored;
all labels relevant to pending tracks are displayed and the PEN indication in LDA and in
SLDA is displayed colored.
else the button was pressed and:
it becomes released;
the labels relevant to pending tracks are not displayed except those “filtered” by the:
EHL order (if HLO is selected).

Note:
the label of the tracks with emergency condition, handover state and miss-linked tracks are always
displayed.

10.2.2.10 Plot Filter – PLO


Objective:
The Plot label order enables/disables the display of the label of PLOT (when displayed in DARD
mode).

Activation:
1. Click LB on PLO button of the LDA.

Result:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 49 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1. The plot’s label is displayed or not, depending on the previous state.

10.2.2.11 Main Menu Area


The MMA window is integrated in the LDA Tool Bar.

Figure 21 - Main Menu Area

According to the power of the role (EXE/PLN/MSP) or according to the CWP suite (ACC or TWR),
the several buttons relevant the orders, which are distributed into the menus, can be insensitive.

10.2.2.11.1 Track Menu


The TRACK Menu allows to the operator to manage the Track presentation.
It’s opened clicking on the TRACK button of the MMA.

Figure 22 - Track Menu

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 50 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 22 - Track Menu on Tower position

TRACK ACTION
SIZE SML Select Label character
LABEL size (SMALL,MEDIUM
MDM BIG)
BIG

LN:X Select the number of Label


lines to show
MINI Leader length selection
SPEED Speed display switch
CTRL Enable the owner Sector
name presentation
PRI Enable the primary tracks
presentation
DOTS Plot history trail switch
RDI Enable Radar indication
presentation
LST Listing for holding flight
OVRL Enable the Label
automatic rotation

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 51 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

O:NE Open the Label Rotation


menu
TYPE/NEXT Enable TYPE/NEXT
visualization on the label
track
CLIM/DESC Enable CLIM/DESC
visualization on the label
track
DIST TO Enable, on Tower position,
GO the visualization of
distance between track
and last trajectory point
(outcop or airport)
EXT Enable the Exitfix
visualization
RST SPV Reset speed vector for
single track
RST HST Reset history dots for
single track

Table 6 - Track Menu Layout

10.2.2.11.2 Map Menu


The MAP Menu allows to the operator to manage MAP to display.
It’s opened clicking on the MAP button of the MMA.

Figure 23 - MAP Menu

MAP ACTION
GPI Get Point Information
DRAW EDIT APW Draw an APW or an APW/SUA area (only
SNET possible with supervisor priviledge)
APW/SUA

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 52 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

EDIT LOC DRAW Draw a Local Map


REDRAW Redraw an already existing Local Map
LOAD Load a previously stored Map
SAVE Save an existing Map
GEOGRAPHIC Opens the geographical maps menu.
WEATHER MET1 Displays the MET1 map
MET2 Displays the MET2 map
MET3 Displays the MET3 map
MET4 Displays the MET4 map
MET5 Displays the MET5 map
MET6 Displays the MET6 map
LOCAL Displays the local Map.
SUPERVISOR Opens the Supervisor Maps menu

Table 7 - Map Menu Layout

10.2.2.11.3 List Menu

The LIST Menu allows to the operator to select the flight lists to display.

It’s opened clicking on the LIST button of the MMA.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 53 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 23 - List Menu

LIST ACTION
ARR Open/Close Arrival list (please refer to § 10.7.1)
DEP Open/Close Departure list (please refer to §10.7.2)
FLDI Open/Close Flight Directory list (please refer to §10.7.3)
SCL Open/Close Sector list (please refer to §10.7.4)
PND Open/Close Pending list (please refer to §10.7.5)
STARTUP Open/Close Start Up list (please refer to §10.7.6)
TAXI Open/Close Taxi list (please refer to §10.7.7)
VFR Open/Close Visual Flight Rule list (please refer to §0)
MODE-S Open/Close Mode-S list (please refer to §10.7.9)
RWY Open/Close Runway list (please refer to §10.7.10)10.7.10
HOLDING Open/Close Holding list (please refer to §
CSL Open/Close Coast list (please refer to §10.7.13)
OPEN/CLOSE Open/Close All list
Table 8 - List Menu Layout

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 54 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.2.2.11.4 Radar Menu


The RADAR Menu allows to the operator to open the radar pictures, send inter-console marks or
positioning the compass rose. It’s opened clicking on the RADAR button of the MMA.

Figure 24 - Radar Menu

RADAR ACTION
WRP Open the WRP choice that allows the operator to select the radar
picture to display (SRP, TRP,FRP)

ICM Open the ICM Menu that allows the operator to send or
acknowledge an interconsole marker.
Table 9 - Radar Menu Layout

10.2.2.11.5 Configuration Menu


The Conf Menu allows the setting of the screen configuration, opaque window, transparent window,
brightness control.
It’s opened clicking on the CONF button of the MMA.

Figure 25 - Configuration Menu

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 55 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

CONF ACTIONS
MESSAGES Open the Messages Area window
MEMO Open the Memo window
LOCAL SETTING LOAD Restore the default local setting or a
previously stored local setting
STORE Store the current local setting
DELETE Delete the current local setting
ESB VERTICAL SIZE SMALL Resize the electronic strips globally,
choosing between an off-line defined
BIG “big” or “small” layout
TRJ CUT Cut the trajectory presentation for an
on-line selectable look-ahead
time/distance.
LOGIN Open the Login window
LOGOUT Perform the LOGOUT of the CWP.
SET MTCD FILTER Filter the MTCD conflict generated by
the hooked flight, removing the conflict
from MTCD list and adding an asterisk
nearby the hooked flight in DIR list
LOGICAL FILTER MONA Filter the Mona warning for the logical
console
SUITE FILTER MONA Filter the Mona warning for all logical
consoles of the suite
PLAYBACK Opens the Playback Control Window
only on CWP
SNET STCA Opens the STCA list
MSAW Opens the MSAW list

Table 10 - Configuration Menu Layout

10.2.2.11.6 Planner Menu


It can be used by a PLN controller and allows the entering of planning orders.

It is opened:
 clicking LB on the PLAN button of the MMA
 clicking LB on the CALLSIGN on the e-strip
 clicking LB on the CALLSIGN of a flight in a table list

The Planner Menu is organized in more sub-menu that are showed in the following figure.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 56 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 26 - PLANNER Menu and Sub Menu

PLAN
DEPARTURE CLEARANCE Clear or re-clear flight departing from a
controlled aerodrome.
WITH RE-ROUTING Clear or re-clear a flight departing from
a controlled aerodrome and re-route it.
EN ROUTE CLEARANCE Clear or re-clear a flight inbounding
from an adjacent airspace.
WITH RE-ROUTING Clear or re-clear a flight inbounding
from an adjacent airspace and re-route
it.
CHANGE TYPE To change the flight rules for a flight in
active or live status.
ARRIVAL CLEARANCE Clear or re-clear a flight arriving to a
controlled aerodrome.
WITH RE-ROUTING Clear or re-clear a flight arriving to a
controlled aerodrome and re-route it.
LEVEL LEVEL ASSIGMENT Modify the planned and cleared levels.
ORDERS Modify the cleared level.
LEVEL CLEARANCE
COORD COORD ENTRY LEVEL Modify the Planned Entry Level

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 57 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

ORDERS (PEL)
COORD EXIT LEVEL Modify the Sector Exit Level
(XFL)
COORD FIR EXIT Modify the FIR exit level and activate a
LEVEL (COO) coordination procedure with the
adjacent Unit.
PHONE COORD (PCO) Insert or modify the FIR exit level if the
OLDI connection is unavailable
RTI – TIP Send an RTI/TIP message
RRQ – RLS Send an RRQ/RLS message
HOLDING HOLDING INSERT Insert a flight in en-route holding.
ORDERS Cancel an inserted flight in en-route
HOLDING CANCEL
holding.
HOLDING EXIT Report the exit of a flight from holding.
TWR/APP TAC START UP Perform a start up clearance to the
ORDERS flight
PUSH Perform a push back clearance to the
BACK flight
TAXI Perform a taxi clearance to the flight
LINE UP Perform a line up clearance to the
flight
RESET Perform to reset the last clearance to
the flight (e.g. Reset the taxi clearance
or reset the start up clearance or reset
the push back clearance)
PARKING BAY Assign the Aerodrome parking bay to
the flight.
CTOT Insert a calculated take off time
UNDO TERMINATE to LIVE Change the flight status from
ORDERS terminated to live
LIVE to PENDING Change the flight status from live to
pending
ACTIVE to PENDING Change the flight status from active to
pending
PENDING to INACTIVE Change the flight status from pending
to inactive
FROM NEXT UNIT Change the flight status from next unit
EDIT Initiate a Probe function execution
FUNCTION
Table 11 - Planner Menu Layout

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 58 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.2.2.11.7 Executive Menu

It can be used by an EXE controller and allows the entering of executive controller orders.

It’s opened:
 clicking LB on the EXE button of the MMA
 clicking MB on the CALLSIGN on the e-strip
 clicking MB on the CALLSIGN of a flight in a table list

The Executive Menu is organized in more sub-menu that are showed in the following figures.

Figure 27 - Executive Menu

EXE ACTION
ASSUME Assume the control of a hooked flight.
TRANSFER Transfer the control of a flight to the next
controlling sector
TRANSFER.FREE Transfer the control of a flight to any
sector
CORRELATE Manually correlate a SFPL to a pending
track.
DECORRELATE Manually de-correlate a controlled track
from the associated SFPL.
Insert a FIX and a Level of Rerouting for
the hooked landing flight.
MISSED APPROCH Insert a Path and time of holding for the
hooked landing flight.
REPORT ORDERS TAKE OFF REP Insert a manual take-off report.
POSITION REP Insert a manual position report.
LANDING REP Insert a manual landing report.
ESTIMATE REVISION Insert an estimate revision on the next
fix.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 59 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

CHANGE SID Allows, by a choice window, to select a


different SID for departing flights
CHANGE STAR Allows, by a choice window, to select a
different STAR for arrival flights
LAST VACATED LEVEL Give the possibility to insert the LVL in
case a fault of mode C occurs.
GPW PRESENTATION 11lL Open the Glide Path Window of 11L
runway (only on TWR position)
11R Open the Glide Path Window of 11R
runway (only on TWR position)
29L Open the Glide Path Window of 29L
runway (only on TWR position)
29R Open the Glide Path Window of 29R
runway (only on TWR position)
QNH MENU QNH ASSIGNMENT Allow to the operator to assign a QNH
value
QNH SELECTION Allow the operator to select the airport or
global QNH
LOCAL FLIGHT FILTER ENABLE STCA Local filter the STCA alarms for the
TCA SINGLE FLIGHT selected flight
ENABLE MSAW Local filter the MSAW alarms for the
SINGLE FLIGHT selected flight
ENABLE APW SINGLE Local filter the APW alarms for the
FLIGHT selected flight
ENABLE APAM Local filter the APAM alarms for the
SINGLE FLIGHT selected flight

Table 12 - Executive Menu Layout

10.2.2.11.8 Flight Data Menu


It is used by to display additional SFPL data and contains more orders to manage SFPLs.

It’s opened
 clicking LB on the FLIGHT button of the MMA
 clicking RB on the CALLSIGN on the e-strip
 clicking RB on the CALLSIGN of a flight in a table list

The Flight data Menu is organized in more sub-menu that are showed in the following figure.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 60 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 28 - FLIGHTDATA Menu

FLIGHT ACTION
FPL INSERT Insert a pending/inactive flight
FPL AMEND Modify a pending SFPL
CANCELLATION FPL CANCEL (CONFIRM) Delete a flight (without
termination event)
FPL TERMINATION Terminate a flight
TERMINATED COPY Give the possibility to copy an
automatic terminated SFPL
data into a new SFPL
TYPE APPROACH Only on Tower or Approach
position, allows to select the
approach type
CALLSIGN MENU FORCED ACT Force the AIS status to the
next sector in trajectory
COF Change of Frequency
ROF Request of Frequency
NEXT UNIT Change of Unit

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 61 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

FROM NEXT UNIT Bring back the SFPL from the


Next Unit
FPL EXTENDED DATA Require displaying of FLDA
for the hooked flight
FPL MESSAGE Require displaying of FPLM
for the hooked flight
TEXT Insert or modify the free text
associated to a SFPL
SSR SSR CODE ASSIGMENT Assignthe SSR code to the
hooked flight
SSR CODE RELEASE Release the SSR code
assigned to the hooked flight
FLIGHT EQUIPMENT MODO S EQUIP Modify Mode-S Equipment.
833 Modify 833 Equipment.
RVSM Modify RVSM Equipment.
BRNAV Modify RNAV Equipment.
FULL EQP Modify Field 10A, Field 10B,
Field 18 Equipment.
TRAJECTORY HORIZONTAL Display the remaining
horizontal trajectory for the
hooked flight.
VERTICAL Open the Vertical AID Window
to display the remaining
vertical trajectory for the
hooked flight,
FFP Insert a new SFPL or recall
the SFPL with the specified
Callsign from the inactive
SFPLs
FPL ICAO INSERT To insert the FPL ICAO code
INACTIVE FLIGHT BROWSE Display the Browse preview
FPL PASSIVE CANCEL Delete a passive flight
FPL PASSIVE AMEND Amend a passive flight
REG. NUMBER Insert the flight registration
number

FAST IDENTIFY Enter a reduced active SFPL


and correlate it to a pending
radar track.
PAPER STRIP Print the strip with dedicated
layout for selected flight

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 62 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

EMPTY STRIP Print empty strip dor the


selected flight

Table 13 - Flight Data Menu Layout

10.2.2.11.9 CPDLC Menu

The CPLDC menu allows controller to exchange orders to the flight using CPDLC procedures and
messages. All the CPDLC orders need to acknowledgment between pilot and controller.
CPLDC menu of the CWP contains all the orders may be sent by CWP controller

Figure 29 - CPDLC Menu and submenu

10.2.2.11.10 Supervisor Menu

It allows to enter system supervision orders from a logical console with the “supervisor” privilege
enabled.

It’s opened by clicking on the SUP button of the MMA.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 63 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 30 - SUPERVISOR Menu and Spv Map Submenu

SUP ACTION
SECTOR CONFIG Combine/split sectors.
FUNCTION Assign an ATS function to a
ASSIGMENT logical console.
MONITORING Enable monitoring of a selected
CWP.
SEND SPV MSG Allow editing and transmission
of a supervisor message to all
CWPs of the ATC Centre.
LOAD MAPS Load set of maps
SET PRIVILEGE Enable the Supervisor privilege.
RELEASE Disable the Supervisor
PRIVILEGE privilege.
MODIFY PASSWORD Modify the supervisor
password.
SPV MAP SEND SECTOR Allows to send a supervisor
map only to a certain sector.
BROADCAST Allows to send a supervisor

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 64 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

map in broadcast to all the


sectors.
CANCEL SECTOR Allows to cancel a supervisor
map only to a certain sector.
BROADCAST Allows to cancel a supervisor
map in broadcast to all the
sectors.
LOGIN DATA Open the Log-in Data window
that display the login/logout of
the nodes

SNET REGION MSAW REGION DESCRIPTOR Open the MSAW region list to
HANDLING modify STCA maps parameters
APW REGION DESCRIPTOR Open the APW region list to
modify STCA maps parameters
SNET TRACK STCA PRESELECTION FILTERING Open the preselection filtering
FILTERING mask for STCA maps
STCA ELECTION AND FILTERING Open the selection and filtering
mask for STCA maps
GLOBAL FILTER STCA Filter the STCA warnings
MSAW Filter the MSAW warnings
APW Filter the APW warnings
APAM Filter the APAM warnings
CLAM Filter the CLAM warnings
RAM Filter the RAM warnings
MTCD Filter the MTCD warnings
AURAL ALERTS STCA Filter the aural STCA warnings
FILTER Filter the aural MSAW warnings
MSAW
APW Filter the aural APW warnings
APAM Filter the aural APAM warnings
CLAM Filter the aural CLAM warnings
RAM Filter the aural RAM warnings
MTCD Filter the aural MTCD warnings
RWY IN USE Open RWY List

Table 14 - Supervisor Menu Layout

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 65 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.2.2.12 Display Speed Vector – DSV


Objective:
the Display Speed Vector order allows to enable/disable the display of speed vector.

Activation:
1. Click on the arrow to set the number of speed vector segment to be displayed above the
position symbol of the track.
2. Click AB on the SPV of the LDA window.

Result:
The speed vector of all tracks is enabled/disabled, depending on the previous state.

De-Activation:
click again AB on the SPV of the LDA window.

10.2.2.13 Track History Trail – THT


Objective:
The Track History Trail order allows to modify the number of track history dots.

Activation:
1. Click AB on the arrows near the HST button of the LDA to decrease or increase the number
of history dots. The actual number of the history dots is showed between the two arrows.

Result:
The history dots of all tracks is enabled/disabled on, depending on the previous state.

Parameters:
number of track history dots (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7).

10.2.2.14 Height Layer On/Off –HLO


Objective:
The Height Layer On/Off order enables/disables the display of plots and tracks label whose altitude
belongs to the range defined with the order EHL. On the position symbol of the filtered track is
displayed the altitude filter over symbol.

Activation:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 66 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1. Activate EHL order click AB on the HLO button of the LDA window.

Result:
The labels plots and tracks label whose altitude belongs to the range defined with the order EHL are
displayed and on the position symbol of the filtered track is displayed the altitude filter over symbol.

De-Activation:
Click AB on the HLO button of the LDA window.

Note:
in case the displaying of labels is disabled, this order enables displaying of label related to the tracks
within the altitude filter.

10.2.2.15 Enter Height Layer –EHL


Objective:
The Enter Height Layer order inputs the height layer value for the altitude filter.

Activation:
1. Click LB in the field following the label “H:” on the LDA and insert the high level value by
means of the keyboard.
2. Click LB in the field following the label “L:” on the LDA and insert the lower level value by
means of the keyboard.

Result:
After the input to the system:

if the input checks result is OK;


then the current height layer parameter is assigned to the local setting.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 67 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.2.2.16 Quick Look feature - QLF


Objective:
the Quick Look order allows to display the tracks which are not shown due to PEN, AIS, NSL and
HLO or DBC filtering.

Activation:
1. Click&Hold on QLF button of the LDA window.

Result:
if the button was released
Then the button becomes pressed and colored;
the SSR Code and Height filters indication will be deleted
Else the button was pressed and:
it becomes released;
The SSR Code and Height Filters will be applied as
previously set

10.2.2.17 Create Block Code – CBC


Objective:
The Change Block Code order allows the entering of up to four SSR block codes to use with the
filter.

Activation:
1. Click AB on CBC button of the LDA window.

Result:
The following window is displayed:

Figure 31 - Create Block Code preview window

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 68 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Parameters:
DBC1 SSR Code
DBC2 SSR Code
DBC3 SSR Code
DBC4 SSR Code
DBC5 SSR Code

Insert one to four SSR code to use with DBC order.


Each block code could be made of one to four digits in the range 0 to 7.
If a block code is made of less than three digits the DBC filter is applied to all the track whose SSR
code begin with those digits

After the input to the system:

if the input checks’ result is OK;


then the block codes are displayed in the LDA and they are available for DBC order.
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

10.2.2.18 Enable Block Code – EBC


Objective:
The EBC order enables/disables the display of the labels with SSR codes belonging to the block
codes previously entered in the MODA A FILTER window.

Activation:
1. Execute the CBC order
2. Click AB on the EBC button of the LDA window.

Result:
The Position Symbol of the tracks and plots whose SSR Code belongs to one of the selected by
means of the CBC order are substituted by the “block code selected” symbol and the track labels of
those tracks are not displayed

De-Activation:
Click AB on the EBC button of the LDA window.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 69 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.2.2.19 Radar/By-pass Selection – BYP


Objective:
The By-pass selection order allows the controller to display only the traffic data coming from a
selected radar
Activation:
1. Click AB on the selection radar button and choose a radar (e.g. R:NB)
2. Click AB on the BYP button of the LDA window
Result:
1. The selection is displayed on the R:XX button of the LDA.
2. The ‘BYP’ string on the relevant button change colour (yellow) and only the tracks coming
from the selected radar are displayed on the GRP.

De-Activation:
Clicking again AB on the BYP button, the bypass state is de-selected
Note:
In "bypass", displayed radar tracks are those received from the selected radar head.
The BYP order is forced if the system is in “DARD Degraded Mode”.
When in BYP mode the relevant button on the LDA of the console is shown with a specific colour.

10.2.2.20 Mode S button


Objective:
The Mode S button allows the controller to force in presentation the Mode S received data on Tack
Label.

Activation:
1- Click AB on the MODS button of the LDA,

Figure 32 - Mode-S switch button

Result:
The mode-s received data are displayed on all the mode’s track label. For further information please
refer to MODE-S management §.

De-Activation:
Click AB on the MODS button of the LDA window.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 70 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.2.2.21 Distance to Go button


Objective:
The DIST TO GO button allows the controller to force in presentation the distance to the airport on
position symbol of arrival SFPL track label.

Activation:
1- Click AB on the DIST TO GO button of the LDA,

Figure 33 - Distance to go button

Result:
On the tracks correlated to arrival SFPL, the missing distance to the airport is displayed.

De-Activation:
Click AB on the on the DIST TO GO button of the LDA window.

10.2.2.22 QNH Selection


Objective:
The QNH input mask allows to change the QNH global or associated to a certain airport. The QNH
is displayed on the relevant field on LDA.
Activation:
1- Click AB on the QNH field of the LDA,

Figure 34 - QNH label

Result:
The following mask is opened:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 71 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 35 - QNH input

By AB clicking on the AIRP field the choice for the airport selection is opened:

Figure 36 - Airport Selection for QNH input

The operator is enabled to choose Global QNH or Airport QNH to be modified.


Upon click on enter button the new QNH is entered and displayed on the LDA.

10.2.2.23 Airport QNH Selection

Objective:
The AIRP selection allows to change the Airport and associated QNH to be displayed on LDA.

Activation:
1. Clicking AB on AIRP label.

Figure 37 - Airport Selection

Result:
The following choice window is opened:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 72 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 38 - Airport Selection

Upon selection of a certain airport (e.g. UKBB) the relevant QNH is applied and displayed on the
AIRP label.

10.2.3 SLDA/TLDA/FLDA Tool Bar


The Secondary Local Data Area (SLDA), Third Local Data Area (TLDA) and Fourth Local Data Area
(FLDA) are Input/Output windows that show the current settings of the related geographic window
and allow the modification of the related “accessible fields”.

Figure 39 - Slda/Tlda/Flda Tool Bar

The read only/accessible fields of the SLDA/TLDA and FLDA are a subset of the ones described for
the LDA. Please refer to §10.2.1.

10.3 Radar Track Label States, Format And Fields

10.3.1 Radar Track Presentation


In the present paragraph is reported a description of the customisation related on the track label.
The description provides:
The content of the track label,
The attribute for each field presentation,
The possible actions on each field.

Track Element Description AB click IB click


Data Block (Label) Label with up five lines of text. Drag&Drop the label
The contents of track label and to position it on a
its various layouts are dedicated point of the
described following. GRP.

Position Symbol Several symbol are used to Hook the track Rotate the Label
display different kind of tracks. around the position
symbol.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 73 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Over symbol over symbol are used to give


additional information
Leader Line Solid line connecting data Switch from LONG to Display the Speed
block to position symbol MINI size of the Vector selected on
leader line. LDA only for the
relevant track.
Owner Sector It is the name of the suite
which controls the flight
Speed Vector Solid line projected ahead of
position symbol
Track History Trail Small filled circle(s)
(i.e. history dots)

Figure 40 - Correlated Track Elements

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 74 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.3.2 Radar Track Label States


System tracks are received from the RDP system and displayed in the GRP and SRP/TRP/FRP
windows.
The layout of the displayed tracks depends on the track state and on Flight Plan Type (e.g.
Arriving, Departing, En-Route, etc).
The description provided in the following chapter is for the following types of track:
UNCORRELATED: tracks not correlated to a SFPL;
TENTATIVE: first correlation of the SFPL with the track made by the system;
NEARBY: tracks outside the sector controlled by other adjacent sector.
NOTIFIED: tracks of interest for the sector but at the moment controlled by another sector.
ADVANCED INFORMATION: tracks planned to enter the sector
CONTROLLED: tracks correlated to a SFPL and controlled by owner sector (first assumption of
control already performed);
HANDOVER: tracks correlated to a SFPL under control transfer between two adjacent sectors:
 Handover track in the transferring sector
 Handover track in the receiving sector
The uncorrelated tracks inside a loaded map volume are displayed in a dedicated colour.

10.3.3 Radar Track Label Format


The track radar label can be displayed in standard and magnified formats:
The standard radar label format is the normal form displayed.
the principle behind the standard label is to:
Display permanently only the minimum information needed by the controller.
Access additional information simply and quickly via Tool Bar (for all tracks) or via label (for
individual tracks).
Automatically remove information as soon as it is no longer of interest to the controller.
Indicate the necessity of controller action on the flight
The magnified form is displayed when the controller hooks the track.
The magnified label displays all the fields for that flight.
The label line order available on the tool bar (LN: 4 button) allows to toggle (select/deselect) display
of label line 4.
The bold chars in the following label layout description is used to put in evidence the fields that will
be ever shown (if present) in the standard format while the other fields will be visualized only in
magnified formats.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 75 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.3.3.1 Uncorrelated Track Label

W R N G A W R N G B
A M O D A ● I A S R C A L S G N
A A F L ↑ G S P D ↑ V R
M H D

Figure 41 - Uncorrelated Track

10.3.3.2 Uncorrelated Track Label inside a loaded map volume

W R N G A W R N G B
A M O D A ● R C A L S G N
A A F L ↑ G S P D

Figure 42 - Uncorrelated track inside a loaded map volume

10.3.3.3 Nearby Track Label

W R N G A W R N G B
C A L S I G N ● R X X X X X X I A S
A A F L ↑ C F L A D E X ↑ V R
G S P D M H D

Figure 43 - Nearby Track


XXXXXX= SCT/TYPE/W

10.3.3.4 Notified Track Label

W R N G A W R N G B
C A L S I G N ● R X X X X X X I A S
A A F L ↑ C F L A D E X ↑ V R
G S P D M H D

Figure 44 - Nearby Track


XXXXXX= SCT/TYPE/W
ADEX=ADES/ADEP

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 76 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.3.3.5 Controlled Track Label on ACC

W R N G A W R N G B
C A L S I G N ● R ↑ X X X X X X R C A L S G N
A A F L ↑ C F L * Y Y Y Y Y
G S P D X F L ↑
A H D G X A S P Z Z Z Z

Figure 45 - Controlled Track


xxxxxx= NXT/TYPE/W
yyyyy= OUTFX/SCTFX/ADES for en-route
yyyyy= SIDIDT for departure
yyyyy= STARIDT for arrival
zzzz=ARC/ROCD
Mode-S Alert presentation: If a mismatch is detected between the mode-s data and SFPL data,
on the track label will be displayed an yellowsquare around the relevant field coming from FDP1 to
alert the controller.
On approach and tower controlled track linked to departing flight plan are coloured in blue.

10.3.3.6 Controlled Track Label on APP and TWR arrival

W R N G A W R N G B
C A L S I G N ● R ↑ X X X X X X R C A L S G N
A A F L ↑ C F L * S I D I D T
G S P D X F L ↑
A H D G X A S P Z Z Z Z

Figure 46 - Controlled Track Departure on APP and TWR

xxxxxx= NXT/TYPE/W
yyyyy= OUTFX/SCTFX/ADES for enroute
zzzz=ARC/ROCD

1
Example: if SAL=/ from CFL on the label an yellowsquare is displayed around the CFL and on the FHI an
yellowsquare is displayed around the SAL.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 77 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.3.3.7 Controlled Track Label on APP and TWR departure

W R N G A W R N G B
C A L S I G N ● R ↑ X X X X X X R C A L S G N
A A F L ↑ C F L * S T A R I D
G S P D X F L ↑
A H D G X A S P Z Z Z Z

Figure 47 - Controlled Track Arrival on APP and TWR


xxxxxx= NXT/TYPE/W
yyyyy= OUTFX/SCTFX/ADES for enroute
zzzz=ARC/ROCD

10.3.3.8 Advanced Information Track Label

W R N G A W R N G B
C A L S I G N ● R X X X X X X I A S
A A F L ↑ P F L ↑ * Y Y Y Y Y ↑ V R
G S P D X F L M H D
A H D G X A S P Z Z Z Z

Figure 48 - Ais Track


xxxxxx= NXT/TYPE/W
yyyyy= OUTFX/SCTFX/ADES for en-route
yyyyy= SIDIDT for departure
yyyyy= STARIDT for arrival
zzzz=ARC/ROCD
Mode-S Alert presentation: If a mismatch is detected between the mode-s data and SFPL data,
on the track label will be displayed an yellowsquare around the relevant field coming from FDP to
alert the controller.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 78 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.3.3.9 Handover Sending

W R N G A W R N G B
C A L S I G N ● R X X X X X X I A S
A A F L ↑ C F L * Y Y Y Y Y ↑ V R
G S P D X F L M H D
A H D G X A S P Z Z Z Z

Figure 49 - Handover Sending Track


xxxxxx= NXT/TYPE/W
yyyyy= OUTFX/SCTFX/ADES for enroute
yyyyy= SIDIDT for departure
yyyyy= STARIDT for arrival
zzzz=ARC/ROCD

10.3.3.10 Handover Receiving/Tentative

W R N G A W R N G B
C A L S I G N ● R X X X X X X
A A F L ↑ C F L * Y Y Y Y Y
G S P D X F L
A H D G X A S P Z Z Z Z

Figure 50 - Handover Receiving Track


xxxxxx= NXT/TYPE/W
yyyyy= OUTFX/SCTFX/ADES for en-route
yyyyy= SIDIDT for departure
yyyyy= STARIDT for arrival
zzzz=ARC/ROCD

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 79 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.3.3.11 Radar Label Fields Description


Line ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION CHARACTERS

Line0 WRNGA Display warning information according to the following 5


: priorities:
1. STCA (highest priority)
2. MSAW
3. APW (lowest priority)
WRNGB Emergency information 5
CDPLC symbol only for flights logged on 1
CP CPDLC communication ( for uplink or downlink 1
communication)
Line1 MODA SSR code 5
:
CALSIGN Callsign 7
● Mode-s symbol only for flights "Mode-S" 1
R RVSM Status 1
CPDLC status 1
↑↓ CPDLC uplink or downlink dialogue open 1
SCT Owner Sector 3
NXT Next Sector 3
NEXT_FR Next Sector Frequency 7
TYPE Type of Aircraft (ICAO format) 4
W Wake Turbulence Category 1
RCALSGN Received Callsign 7
Line2 A QNH correction indicator 1
:
AFL Actual Flight Level (Mode C altitude/level) 3
↑ Attitude indicator 1
G Acronym ‘Ground’ 1
SPD Ground Speed 3
CFL/SEL Cleared Flight Level / Selected Altitude 3
PEL Planned Entry Flight Level 3
INBFX Sector Inbound Fix 5
OUTFX Fir Outbound Fix 5
SCTFX Sector exit Fix 5
ADES Destination aerodrome (4 characters) 4
* 4th line filter indicator 1

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 80 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

SIDIDNT SID Identifier 7


STARIDT STAR Identifier 7
Line3 GSPD Ground Speed 4
:
XFL Exit Flight Level 3
APT Approach Type 3
SFL Supplementary Flight Level 3
Line4 AHDG1/MHD Assigned Heading / Magnetic Heading 5
:
ASP/IAS Assigned Speed / Indicated Air Speed (under the 3
250 FL the Air Speed is expressed in Knots upon the
250 FL the Air Speed is expressed in Mach)
ARC/VR Assigned rate of Climbing / Vertical Rate Value 3
ROCD Rate of Climb/Descent. 4

Table 15 - Label Fields Descriptions

10.3.3.12 Radar Label Fields Interactions


Field AB button IB button WB button
CALLSGN CallSign Menu Hook / Unhook
SCT Next Sector Menu
Preview Window for text
TEXTxxx
insertion (FHI)
LVL Choice Window (available
LVL only when there is no Mode C
information and/or for FPT)
CFL/ PEL CFL/PEL Choice Window
Set Speed Vector for single Set History Dots for single
GSPD
track track
XFL XFL Choice Window
OUTFX DCT Choice Window
Toggle display (Track
Type FFP/RER Preview Window
Label)
AHDG OpenHeading Closed Heading
ASP ASP Choice Window
P&H display CRC
ARC or CRC ARC Choice Window
temporarily
Position Symbol Hook Label Rotation
ADEP FFP Preview Window
ADES FFP/RER Preview Window
RFL RFL Choice Window

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 81 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Field AB button IB button WB button


FIX Name REP Preview Window
FIX Time
REV Preview Window
(ETO/ATO)
ETD/ATD TKF Preview window
CTOT CTOT Preview Window
ETA: Automatically calculated
ETA/ATA by the system
ATA LND Preview Window
SID SID Choice Window
STAR STAR Choice Window
RVSM RVSM Choice Window
8.33 8.33 Choice Window
i) FFP Preview Window for
Departure runway
RWY
ii) STAR/RWY Preview Window
for Arrival runway
SSR SSR Preview Window
STARTUP/TAXI Start-up/Taxi Submenu
Flight Rule FFP Preview Window
IDENTIFY Preview Window (for
Mode A
uncorrelated Tracks)
STRA
RJC Acknowledge

Phone Coordination Preview


PHO
Window
Table 16 - Label Fields Interactions
The following orders allow to change the characteristics of the geographic area where the radar data
are displayed.

10.3.3.12.1 Selection of Speed Vector for single track


The CWP allows the controller to open a menu for the selection of the minutes of speed vector to be
displayed on the relevant track.
SPD
GLO
1
2
3
4
5

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 82 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

If the SPV button on LDA is pressed, upon the selection of the number of speed vector for the single
track, the CWP will display automatically the selected minutes of speed vector for the relevant track.
If the controller clicks on GLO button, the CWP will apply the number and visibility of speed vector
defined on the LDA global configuration of SPV.
It is possible to select different number of speed vector for the same track on different radar window
(e.g. 4 on GRP and 5 on SRP).

10.3.3.12.2 Selection of History Dots for single track


The CWP allows the controller to open a menu for the selection of the number of history dots to be
displayed on the relevant track.
HST
GLO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

If the HST button on LDA is pressed, upon the selection of the number of history dots, the CWP will
display automatically the selected number of history dots for the relevant track.
If the controller clicks on GLO button the CWP will apply the number of history dots defined on the
LDA global configuration of SPV.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 83 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

It is possible to select different number of history dots for the same track on different radar window
(e.g. 4 on GRP and 5 on SRP).

10.4 Alarm Presentation on Air Radar Track Label

W R N G A W R N G B M N
C A L S I G N ● R X X X X X X I A S R C A L S G N
A A F L ↑ C F L * Y Y Y Y Y ↑ V R
G S P D X F L ↑ M H D
A H D G X A S P Z Z Z Z F R E E T E X T

In the field WARNA could be presented the following alarms displayed with the indicated:

PRIORITY ALARM DISPLAYED TEXT ON THE LABEL

1 STCA Alert STCA

MSAW Alert (related MSAW Level


2 MSAW
“NNN”)

3 APW Alert APW

4 APAM Alert APAM

5 SSR code deviation SSR

6 SSR previous code sqw The number of the new code

COF, ROF, REJECTION OF


7 Coordination Procedure COORDINATION PROPOSAL, AIDC
MESSAGE

8 PCO/COO Reminders PCO or COO

9 MANUAL TOC REMINDER TOC

10 TERMINATED SFPL TERM

In the field WARNB could be presented the following alarms displayed with the indicated:

PRIORITY ALARM DISPLAYED TEXT ON THE LABEL

1 Emergency HJK;RCF;EMR

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 84 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

2 ADS-B Emergency ADS

3 Strategic Constraint STR

4 Number of aircraft In formation FRM ‘#’

5 STS in case of the field is not empty STSF18

In field MN are displayed MONA deviation between track and SFPL information:

PRIORITY ALARM DISPLAYED TEXT ON THE LABEL

1 CLAM Warning FL

2 RAM Warning ← or →

Upon activation of any type of CLAM filter the alarm shall not be displayed on the track label.
The RAM warning is displayed as an arrow on the line zero of track label and on FHI (please refer to
FHI description).
Upon activation of any type of RAM filter the alarm shall not be displayed on track label or FHI.

The following customization shall be applied for ADS-B warning derived data:

Coding Meaning String on Label


(Binary) (Decimal)
000 0 No Emergency
001 1 General Emergency EMER
010 2 Lifeguard/Medical Emergency HOSP
011 3 Minimum Fuel FUEL
100 4 No Communication COMS
101 5 Unlawful Interference HJCK
110 6 Downed Aircraft DOWN
111 7 Reserved TEST

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 85 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5 Menu And Order Management


The MMA window is integrated in the LDA Tool Bar.

Figure 51 - Main Menu Area


According to the power of the role (EXE/PLN) or according to the CWP’s suite (ACC or TWR), the
several buttons relevant the orders, which are distributed into the menus, can be insensitive.

10.5.1 Track Menu


TRACK
SIZE SML
LABEL
MDM
BIG
LN:X
MINI
SPEED
CTRL
PRI
DOTS
RDI
LST
OVRL
O:NE
TYPE/NEXT
CLIM/DESC
EXT
RST SPD Reset all the speed
vector on the single
radar picture
RST HST Reset all the
history dots on the
single radar picture
Figure 52 - Track Menu layout

10.5.1.1 Label size selection


Objective:
The Label size selection allows the operator to select the size of all labels.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 86 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Activation:
1. click LB on the SIZE LABEL button of the TRACK menu.
2. Press LB on the desired value.
Result:
1. The following choice window with the possible values (SMALL, MEDIUM and BIG) is
displayed;

Figure 53 - Label size selection choice window

2. The labels are showed with the selected size .

10.5.1.2 Label Lines Selection – LAB


Objective:
the Label selection allows the operator to select the label lines to be displayed.

Activation:
1. click LB on the LN: button of the TRACK menu.
2. Press LB on the desired value.

Result:
1. A choice window with the possible values (2, 3 or 4) is displayed;

Figure 54 - Label selection choice window

2. The labels are showed with the selected number of lines.

Note:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 87 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

this order operates on both plot and track labels; displaying of the first plot label line is triggered with
displaying of the first track label line.
The default lines displayed are two; the minimum number of label lines displayed is two.

10.5.1.3 Set Leader Line–LDL


Objective:
The Set Leader Line order allows the operator to select one of the two different lengths allowed for
the leader line.
Activation:
To change the length of the leader line of all the tracks:
1. click LB on the LONG/MINI button belonging to the TRACK menu.

To change the length of the leader line of a single track:


2. click MB on the leader line of the track.

Result:
1. all tracks switch from long to short leader lines (or vice versa).
2. The leader line of the selected track switches from long to short leader line (or vice versa).

10.5.1.4 Display Speed Field – SPD

Objective:
The following order enable/disable the presentation of the ground speed in the radar track labels.
Activation:
1. CLICK with LB on the SPEED button of the TRACK menu.
Result:
1. The ground speed is showed on reduced format of the track labels.
De-Activation:
CLICK with LB on the SPD button of the TRACK menu.
Note:
This order is applied to all tracks.
In order to display SPEED on the controlled tracks labels the Label selection (LAB) have to be set at
least to 3.

10.5.1.5 Display Controller Field –CTRL


Objective:
The following order enable/disable the presentation of the identification of the owner sector over the
position symbol of the radar tracks of the controlled tracks.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 88 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Activation:
1. Click LB on the CTRL button of the TRACK menu.

Result:
1. Over the position symbol of the radar tracks of the controlled tracks is showed the
identification of the owner sector

De-Activation:
Click LB on the CTRL button of the TRACK menu.

Note:
This order is applied to all controlled tracks.

10.5.1.6 Primary tracks –PRI


Objective:
The Primary tracks order enables/disables displaying of the labels of the primary tracks.

Activation:
1. click LB on PRI button of the TRACK menu.

Result:
if the button was released
then the button becomes pressed and colored;
all labels relevant to primary tracks are displayed and the PRI indication in TRACK
menu is displayed colored.
else the button was pressed and:
it becomes released;
the labels relevant to primary tracks are not displayed

10.5.1.7 Plot History Trail - PHT


Objective:
The Plot History Trail order enables/disables the display of the plot history trail.

Activation:
1. Click LB on DOTS button of the TRACK menu.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 89 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Result:
1. The plot history trails are displayed or not, depending on the previous state.

10.5.1.8 Radar Track Indication – RDI


Objective:
Display on track label, the radar that owns the track.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the RDI button belonging to the TRACK menu.

Result:
1. The radar that owns the track is showed on the labels or removed depending on the previous
state.
Note:
This order is forseen on local tracks (not on system tracks).

10.5.1.9 Enable/Disable List Status – LST


Objective:
The enable/disable List Status order allows the PLN/EXE controller to enable the listing for a flight in
holding status

Activation:
1. Select a flight; click LB on the LST button on the TRACK menu .

Result:
if the flight is in holding status
then the track label is not displayed and the number identifying the flight in the HLD list is
displayed in place of the track control sector over the track.
else nothing happens

De-Activation:
Select the flight; click LB on the LST button on the TRACK menu.

10.5.1.10 De Conflic Label - OVRL


Objective:
The De- Conflict Label order enables/disables the application of de-conflict fr the displayed track
labels.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 90 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Activation:
1. Click LB on the OVRL button of the TRACK menu.
Result:
1. The labels are organized according to the de-conflict algoritm in such a way that no label is
over another one.

Note:
If a label was previously moved manually by the ATCO the de-conflict will not be applied on that
label.

10.5.1.11 Orientation Menu–O:NE


Objective:
The orientation menu allows the ATCO to chose a direction for the display of the track labels.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the “O:” (orientation button) on the TRACK menu.
2. Click on one of the button NE, N, SE, S, SW, W, NW or N to choose the labels position.

Result:
1. The following menu is displayed:

Figure 55 - Orientation menu

NE North east
E East
SE South East
S South
SW South west
W West

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 91 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

NW North west
N North
DCF Deconflict

2. The track label are displayed according to the chosen direction.

Note:
The default orientation of the leader line is North East.

10.5.1.12 Type/Next filter – TYPE/NEXT

Objective:
The TYPE/NEXT button allow to force in presentation the TYPE/NEXT field of the track label in
standard mode.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the TYPE/NEXT button of the TRACK menu.

Result:
1. The TYPE/NEXT visualization filter is showed.

10.5.1.13 Clim/Desc Filter – CLIMB/DESC

Objective:
The CLIMB/DESCbutton allow to force in presentation the CLIMB/DESCfield of the track label in
standard mode (LN:4).

Activation:
1. click LB on the CLIM/DESC button of the TRACK menu.

Result:
1. CLIM/DESC information is displayed on track labels.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 92 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.1.14 Exit Fix filter - EXT

Objective:
The EXT button allow to force in presentation the EXTfield of the arrival track label on approach
position in standard mode.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the EXT button of the TRACK menu.

Result:
The EXT information is displayed on track labels.

10.5.1.15 Reset Speed Vector (single track)- RST SPV

Objective:
The RST SPV allows to reset all the speed vector on the single radar picture

Activation:
1. Click LB on the RST SPVbutton of the TRACK menu.

Result:
The speed vector is not displayed.

10.5.1.16 Reset History Dots (single track) - RST HST

Objective:
The RST HST allow to reset history dots for the single radar picture.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the RST HST button of the TRACK menu.

Result:
The history dots is not displayed

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 93 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.2 Map Menu

MAP
GPI
DRAW EDIT SNET APW
APW/SUA
EDIT LOC DRAW
REDRAW
LOAD
DELETE
SAVE
GEOGRAPHIC MAP1
MAP2
MAP3
MAP4
MAP5
MAP6
MAP7
MAP8
MAP9
MAP10
WEATHER MET1
MET2
MET3
MET4
MET5
MET6
LOCAL LOC1
SUPERVISOR SPVM

Figure 56 - Map Menu Layout

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 94 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.2.1 Get Point Information – GPI

Objective:
Get Point Information allows the Controller to visualize information related on some displayed
geographical element such as routes, sectors, etc.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the GPI button on the MAP MENU.
2. Move the mouse cursor on the GRP until it is over the desired geographical element.
3. P&H LB on an element with yellow indication.

Result:
1. The button GPI becomes pressed and the mouse cursor change its shape.

Figure 57 - Get Point Information cursor

2. If the element under the cursor became highlighted with yellow color there are information
available about it.
3. Awindow with related information is displayed. When LB button is released the information
window is closed.

Figure 58 - Get Point Information example

De-Activation:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 95 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Get Point Information facility have to be disabled by deselecting the GPI button on LDA Window.

Note:
When the cursor in GPI mode is possible to interact only with geographical elements of the GRP but
not with other objects like tracks and transparent list.
GPI function presentation on SNET areas: In GPI modality, by clicking with AB on a SNET area
(APW/STCA/MSAW) is presented the following label containing the information relative to that area.

Figure 59 - Gpi Presentation On Apw Area

10.5.2.2 Volume Maps


The volume mapsare off-line defined in the system and loaded by the CWP at the start up. The
volume maps are not visible on GRP.
If a pending track enters in the volume map the following events occurs on CWP:
1. The track is colored in orange (please refer to [RD2].
2. On the right corner of the alarm list is displayed the ‘PEN’ warning
3. The aural alarm buzz
The customization of the volume map items on auxiliary radar windows (SRP, TRP, FRP) is the
same of the GRP.
Upon execution of CPA (Console PhysicalAssignment) the volume map is reloaded.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 96 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.2.3 Draw Apw And Apw/Sua Map


Objective:
The DRAW APW/SUA LOCAL FUNCTION allows the EXE/PLN controller to draw an APW or SUA
map.

Activation:
1. click LB on APW or APW/SUA button of the MAPS – DRAW - EDIT SNET. The following
window appears:

Figure 60 - MAP EDIT NAME window

The controller insert a name for the map and click on ENTER button. The following window appears:

Figure 61 - DRAW APW/SUA window

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 97 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

TRASPARENT To select a transparent Map


PATTERNED To select the patterned
MAP FILL To select the fill colour
PATTERN To select the type of pattern
LAT/LONG LAT and LONG indication
DRAW POINT To Draw a point
REDRAW To REDRAW a map
NEW AREA To Draw a new AREA
DELETE To Delete a AREA
ENTER To define the map parameters
EXIT To exit from the edit modality

Result:
1. The controller when finish to draw the area can click on ENTER button to define the
APW/SUA parameters by the APWSUA PROPERTY EDITOR window.

Figure 62 - Example of APW/SUA map

De-Activation:
LB click on EXIT button of DRAW APW SUA window.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 98 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.2.4 Draw Local Map

The local maps can be generated and stored in the CWP. A local map can not have any submap: it
is composed by points, vectors, broken lines (composed by one or more vectors), text, arcs and
circles.
The following attributes can be associated to:

 a point: a pre-defined symbol;


 a broken line: continuous, dashed, dotted or dashed-dotted lines;
 circle or arcs: no attribute;

Objective:
The Local Map Generation order allows to start the editing of a local map.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the DRAW button in the MAP menu and select the EDIT LOC - DRAW button.
2. Click LB on a colored button to select the map colour.

Result:
1. The Draw Local Map menu is closed and a menu is displayed to select the colour to be used
to draw the map.

Figure 63 - LMG – Color Maps menu

2. the CHOICE window is closed and the chosen color will be used to draw the local map. The
Local Maps Menu, , is displayed

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 99 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 64 - Local Maps menu

SYMBOL draw symbols (DOT)


BROKEN draw brokens (SBR)
AREA draw area
ARC draw arcs
CIRCLE draw circle
TEXT draw texts (DTX)
REDRAW Modify the last map
drawn
CANCEL undo previous (DCO)
action
END (EML)
To end the editing
session

Acting on the local maps menu is possible to access the tools to draw the various elements of the
map or to undo the last action(s).
The action to draw the single elements are described in the following paragraphs.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 100 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.2.4.1 Draw Symbol – DOT

Objective:
the Draw Symbol order allows to draw a symbol in a local map.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the SYMBOL button of the Local Maps Menu.
2. Click LB in the SYMBOL field:
3. Click LB on the preferred type of symbol.
4. Click LB in the SIZE field:
5. Click LB on the preferred size.
6. Insert the LAT/LONG parameters by keyboard and click LB on the DRAW button to draw the
symbol
7. Click LB on the REDRAW button to redraw the symbol
8. Click LB in the EXIT button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 65 - Draw Symbol preview window

2. A choice window containing the set of available symbols parameter, is displayed (e.g., point,
plus, square, etc.);

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 101 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 66 - Draw Symbol – Symbol menu

3. The choice is closed and the chosen symbol is displayed in the SYMBOL field;
4. The choice window containing the values “BIG” and “SMALL”, is displayed.

Figure 67 - Draw Symbol – Size menu

5. The choice is closed and the chosen size is displayed in the SIZE field.
6. The symbol is drown on the indicated lat&long of the GRP.
7. The symbol can be moved or modified.
8. Return to the LOCAL MAPS MENU.

Parameters:
SYMBOL Symbol to insert
SIZE Symbol size
LAT Symbol latitude
LONG Symbol longitude

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 102 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

If some problems occurs the related diagnostic is displayed in the Warning Sub Area .

Note:
A quick way to draw a symbol is to click LB in the GRP position where the operator wish to draw the
symbol after the other parameter have been set. The latitude and longitude parameters of the
selected point are displayed in the preview window and the symbol is automatically drawn on the
screen.
If an attribute is changed during the drawing the change will affect the previous drawn symbols also.

10.5.2.4.2 Draw Broken – SBR

Objective:
The Draw Broken order allows to draw a broken line in a local map.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the BROKEN button of the LOCAL MAPS MENU.
2. Click LB on the STYLE button of the Local Maps Menu.
3. Click LB on the preferred STYLE.
4. Click LB on the WIDTH button of the Local Maps Menu.
5. Click LB on the preferred WIDTH.
6. Click LB in the SYMBOL button.
7. Click LB on the preferred type of symbol.
8. Type the LAT/LONG parameters and then click LB in the DRAW button, to draw a segment
joining this point with the previous one. If this is the first point is drawn only the vertex
symbol;
or
Click LB in the GRP position chosen. the co-ordinates of the point are displayed in the
LAT/LONG fields. An apex symbol is drawn in that position. If this is not the first point a
segment is drawn joining this vertex with the previous one.
9. Click LB on the CLOSE button
10. Click LB on the REDRAW button.
11. Click LB in the EXIT button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 103 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 68 - Draw Broken preview window

2. The choice window containing the selectable STYLE of line, is displayed.

Figure 69 - Draw Broken – Style menu

3. The choice is closed and the chosen STYLE is displayed in the STYLE field.
4. The choice window containing the selectable WIDTH of line, is displayed.

Figure 70 - Draw Broken – Width menu

5. The choice is closed and the chosen WIDTH is displayed in the WIDTH field.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 104 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

6. A choice window containing the set of available symbols parameter, is displayed (e.g., point,
plus, square, etc.);

Figure 71 - Draw Broken – Symbol menu

7. The choice is closed and the chosen symbol is displayed in the SYMBOL field;
8. The Broken is drawn on the GRP according to the operator selection.
9. The last apex is joined with the first one and the broken is closed.
10. The broken can be moved or modified.
11. The preview window is closed.

Parameters:
STYLE Line style
WIDTH Line width
SYMBOL Vertex symbol
LAT Vertex latitude
LONG Vertex longitude

If some problems occur, the related diagnostic is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Note:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 105 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

If an attribute is changed during the drawing of a broken line the change affects the previously
drawn apexes also.

The preview window is displayed with the following default values:


 STYLE = CONTINUOUS
 WIDTH = 1
 SYMBOL = - (blank)

The line style are sampled inErrore. L'origine riferimento non è stata trovata..

10.5.2.4.3 Draw Area

Objective:
the Draw Area order allows to draw an area in a local map.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the AREA button of the LOCAL MAPS MENU.
2. click LB on PATTERNED or TRASPARENT button:
3. Type the LAT/LONG parameters and then click LB in the DRAW button, to draw a segment
joining this point with the previous one. If this is the first point is drawn only the vertex
symbol;
or
click LB in the GRP position chosen. the co-ordinates of the point are displayed in the
LAT/LONG fields. An apex symbol is drawn in that position. If this is not the first point a
segment is drawn joining this vertex with the previous one.
4. click LB on REDRAW button.
5. click LB on the EXIT button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 106 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 72 - Draw Broken preview window

2. The cursor changes its shape and it is possible to draw the area PATTERNED or
TRANSPARENT according to the selection.
3. The area is drawn on the GRP according to the selected points.
4. The area can be moved or modified.
5. Close the preview window.

Parameters:
PATTERNED The area is
colored
TRASPARENT The area is
transparent
LAT Vertex latitude
LONG Vertex longitude

If some problems occur, the related diagnostic is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 107 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.2.4.4 Draw Arc

Objective:
The Draw Arc order allows to draw an arc in a local map.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the ARC button of the LOCAL MAPS MENU.
2. Insert the angle value in the ANGLE field (360 for a circle);
3. Click LB on DIRECTION button;
4. Click LB on the preview fields LAT/LONG of the CENTRE and type the LAT/LONG
parameters
or
Click LB in the desired GRP position.
5. Click LB on the preview fields LAT/LONG of the RADIUS: and type the LAT/LONG
parameters
or
Click MB in the GRP position.
6. Click LB in the DRAW button to draw the arc.
7. Click LB in the REDRAW button to redraw the arc.
8. Click in the END button to close the preview window and return to the LOCAL MAPS MENU.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 73 - Draw Arc preview window

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 108 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

2. The value is displayed in the ANGLE field and it will be apllyed on the drawn ARC.
3. A choice window is displayed to choose the direction of the ARC (clockwise or
anticlockwise):

Figure 74 - Draw Arc and Circle – Direction menu


4. The CENTRE of the CIRCLE is set.
5. The RADIUS of the CIRCLE is set
6. The CIRCLE is drawn according to the CENTRE and RADIUS selection.
7. The CIRCLE can be moved or modified.
8. The preview window is closed.

Note:
The preview window is displayed with the following default values:
 ANGLE = 360
 DIR = Clockwise

Parameters:
ANGLE arc angle
DIR draw direction
CENTRE: LAT centre latitude
CENTRE: LONG centre longitude
RADIUS: LAT radius latitude
RADIUS: LONG radius longitude

If some problems occur, the related diagnostic is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 109 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.2.4.5 Draw Circle

Objective:
The Draw Circle order allows to draw a circle in a local map.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the CIRCLE button of the LOCAL MAPS MENU.
2. Click LB on the preview fields LAT/LONG of the CENTRE and type the LAT/LONG
parameters
or
Click LB in the desired GRP position.
3. Click LB on the preview fields LAT/LONG of the RADIUS: and type the LAT/LONG
parameters
or
Click MB in the GRP position.
4. Click LB in the DRAW button to draw the arc.
5. Click LB in the REDRAW button to redraw the arc.
6. Click in the END button to close the preview window and return to the LOCAL MAPS MENU.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 75 - Draw Circle preview window

2. The CENTRE of the CIRCLE is set.


3. The RADIUS of the CIRCLE is set

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 110 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

4. The CIRCLE is drawn according to the CENTRE and RADIUS selection.


5. The CIRCLE can be moved or modified.
6. The preview window is closed.

Parameters:
CENTRE: LAT centre latitude
CENTRE: LONG centre longitude
RADIUS: LAT radius latitude
RADIUS: LONG radius longitude

If some problems occur, the related diagnostic is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

10.5.2.4.6 Draw Text – DTX

Objective:
The Draw Text order allows to draw text in a local map.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the TEXT button of the Local Maps Menu.
2. Click LB on the TEX field and insert the TEXT to be displayed on the LOCAL MAP.
3. Select the preferred SIZE.
4. Click LB on the preview fields LAT/LONG of the RADIUS: and type the LAT/LONG
parameters;
5. Click LB on DRAW button;
6. Click LB on the REDRAW button;
7. Click LB in the END button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 111 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 76 - Draw Text preview window

1. The inserted TEXT is displaye in the TEXT field.


2. A choice window containing the SIZE option is opened:

Figure 77 - Draw Text – Size menu

3. The choice window is closed and the chosen size is displayed in the SIZE field of the
preview window;
4. The LAT/LONG indication is displayed on the relevant fields.
5. The text is displayed on the selected position of the GRP.
6. The TEXT can be moved or modified.
7. The preview window is closed.

Parameters:
SIZE text character size
TEXT text to be drawn
LAT text latitude
LONG text longitude

If some problems occurs the related diagnostic is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 112 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

the following steps have to be repeated until the completion of the drawn:
A quick way to draw text on the screen is to click LB in the GRP position where the operator wish to
draw the text after the other parameter have been set. The latitude and longitude parameters of the
selected point are displayed in the preview window and the text itself is automatically drawn.

10.5.2.4.7 Redraw Local Map

Objective:
The REDRAW Local Map order allows the EXE / PLN controller to modify the last drawn map.

Activation:
1. Click LB on REDRAW of the Local Map menu.

Result:
1. The pointer of mouse change its form and the operator can to modify the last map.

10.5.2.4.8 Undo Last Draw Action – DCO

Objective:
The Undo Last Draw Action order allows to delete the previous editing action during the generation
of a local map.

Activation:
1. On the LOCAL MAPS menu window click LB on CANCEL button.

Result:
1. The last editing action is deleted.

10.5.2.4.9 End Local Map – End Local Map

Objective:
The End Local Map order allows the EXE / PLN controller to end the editing session of a local map.

Activation:
1. Click LB on END of the Local Map menu.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 113 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Result:
1. The editing session is stopped.

10.5.2.5 Load Map

Objective:
The Load MAP order allows the EXE/PLN controller to display on the local GRP a stored local map.

Activation:
1. Click LB on LOAD button of the DRAW MENU(MAP MENU DRAW button) window.
2. Click LB on the selected map name and click on ENTER button.

Result:
1. A window is displayed with the available maps (stored with the SAVE map order).
2. The window disappears and the map is displayed on the local GRP.

Note:
See SAVE MAP order.

10.5.2.6 Save Map

Objective:
The SAVE MAP order allows the EXE/PLN controller to stored a local map.

Activation:
1. Upon creation of a local map by means od DRAW local map functionality, click LB on SAVE
button of the DRAW MENU.
2. The controller insert the name of the map to be saved.

Result:
1. A preview window with a text field is displayed.
2. The window disappears and the map is stored in a predefined path..

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 114 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.2.7 Geographic

Objective:
The GEOGRAPHIC order allows the EXE/PLN controller to display the GRP MAPS MENU.

Activation:
1. Click LB on GEOGRAPHIC button of the MAP menu window.

Figure 78 - GRP maps menu

Result:
1. The GRP MAPS MENU is Update and displayed on the local CWP.

10.5.2.8 Weather

Objective:
The Meteo Maps order shows six meteo maps (buttons from MET1 to MET6)

Activation:
1. Click LB on the WEATHER button of the MAP menu.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 115 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Result:
1. Different background of the rectangle represents a meteo map clicking LB on the above
mentioned buttons.

10.5.2.9 Supervisor

Objective:
The SUPERVISOR button shows the Supervisor Maps menu.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the SUPERVISOR button of the MAP menu.

Result:
1. The Supervisor Maps menu is opened.

10.5.3 List Menu


LIST
ARR
DEP
SCL
PND
STARTUP
TAXI
VFR
MODE-S
RWY
HOLDING
CSL
OPEN/CLOSE
Table 17– List Menu Layout

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 116 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.4 Radar Menu


RADAR
WRP
ICM
Table 18– Radar Menu Layout

10.5.4.1 Working Radar Pictures- WRP


The working radar picture (WRP) function allows the operator to select the radar picture to display
(SRP, TRP,FRP). For additional information please refer to § 10.1.2.

10.5.4.2 Inter-console Mark- ICM


Objective:
The Inter Console Mark order (ICM) is used to attract the attention of an EXE controller of another
sector on a particular point of the GRP window. The receiving controller has to acknowledge the
message using the ICA order. If the range scale or offset on the receiving CWP is such that the
symbol cannot be seen then a warning flag is displayed in the RDPAL of the receiving CWP.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the ICM button in the RADAR menu;
2. Click on SEND button;
3. Move the mouse pointer on the selected point of the GRP window and click LB;
4. Click LB on the chosen receiving EXE SECTOR

Result:
1. The ICM menu is displayed:

Figure 79 - Inter-console Mark Menu

2. The shape of the pointer changes:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 117 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 80 - Pointer shapes

3. The ICM choice window containing the possible sector where the ICM could be sentis
displayed;

4. The ICM symbol is displayed flashing in the same GRP position on both the sending and
receiving CWP.
Parameters:
Receiving sector.

Note:
If the range scale or offset on the receiving CWP is such that the symbol cannot be seen then a
warning flag is displayed in the Alarm list of the receiving CWP.

10.5.4.3 Interconsole Mark Acknowledge –ICA

Objective:
The Inter-console Mark Acknowledge order allows the controller to acknowledge a received inter-
console mark.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the ICM button in the Radar menu and select the ACK button from the ICM
choice menu.

Result:
1. A CHOICE window is displayed with the list of the ICMs that can be acknowledged: click LB
on the chosen ICM that will stop blinking on the sending and receiving CWPs.

10.5.4.4 Inter-console Mark Cancel – ICC

Objective:
The Inter-console Mark Cancel order allows the controller to remove an inter-console mark.

Activation:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 118 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1. On the sending CWP, click LB on the ICM button in the radar menu and select the CANCEL
button from the ICM choice menu;
2. On the sending CWP, click LB on the chosen ICM;
3. On the receiving CWP, click LB on the ICM button in the radar menu and select the
CANCEL button from the ICM choice menu;
4. On the receiving CWP, click LB on the chosen ICM.

Result:
1. On the sending CWP, a CHOICE window is displayed with the list of the ICMs that can be
cancelled;
2. The chosen ICM is removed on both the sending and receiving CWP;
3. On the receiving CWP, a CHOICE window is displayed with the list of the ICMs that can be
cancelled;
4. The chosen ICM is removed only on the receiving CWP.

10.5.5 Configuration Menu


CONF
MESSAGES
MEMO
LOCAL SETTING LOAD
STORE
DELETE
ESB VERTICAL SIZE SMALL
BIG
TRJ CUT
LOGIN

SET MTCD FILTER


LOGICAL FILTER MONA2 CLAM
RAM

2
Upon enable of the filter, the row of the relevant alarm in the cascade menu is displayed in red color. Upon
disable of the filter, the row of the relevant alarm in the cascade menu is displayed in default color.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 119 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

SUITE FILTER MONA3 CLAM

RAM
PLAYBACK
SNET STCA
MSAW
Table 19 - Configuration Menu Layout

10.5.5.1 Messages

Objective:
The messages function allows the ATCO to sent messages to the other CWP’s ATCO (INTER-
CONSOLE message) or to input a local message (SUITE message).

Activation:
1. Click LB on the MESSAGES button of the CONFIGURATION MENU.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 81 - Message preview window

3
Upon enable of the filter, the row of the relevant alarm in the cascade menu is displayed in red color. Upon
disable of the filter, the row of the relevant alarm in the cascade menu is displayed in default color.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 120 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.5.1.1 Suite Message

Objective:
The Suite Message order allows the editing of a local message.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the TEXT button of the SUITE MESSAGE AREA of the MESSAGES window.

Result:
The following window is displayed:

Figure 82 - Suite Text preview window

Parameters:
MESSAGE local message, i.e. alphanumeric string of up to 26 characters

the new message replaces the previous message in the MESSAGES window and the preview
window disappears.

Note:
No checks are performed on the message in input.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 121 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.5.2 Inter-console Message – IMG

Objective:
The Inter-console Message order allows to edit, delete or transmit an interconsole message to
another CWP.

Activation:
Click LB on the TEXT button of the section “Inter-Console Message” of the MESSAGE AREA
window.
Input the message in the TEXT button and the sector name where the message should be send.

Result:
The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 83 - Inter-console Message preview window

The message will be displayed in the sender and receiver MESSAGE AREA window with the
specified sector (receiver) blinking.

Parameters:
MESSAGE message to send, i.e. alphanumeric string of up to 26
characters
SCT sector of the receiving CWP (3 char)

Note:
Before sending a new IMG message, the previously sent IMG message shall be deleted.
Furthermore, if the fields are not filled, the previous IMG is cancelled.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 122 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.5.3 Inter-console Message Acknowledge – IMA

Objective:
The Inter-console Message Acknowledge order allows to acknowledge the message sent by a
controller of another CWP in the site.

Activation:
Click LB on the ACK button of the MESSAGE AREA window.

Result:
The message stops blinking.

Note:
in case of errors, the related diagnostic messages are displayed in the Diagnostic List.

10.5.5.4 MEMO window

Objective:
The MEMO window allows to the controller to annotate the frequency information of some sector.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the MEMO button of the CONFIGURATION MENU.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 84 - Memo window

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 123 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Parameters:
SEC Sector Name
U. Freq Upper Frequency
Lev Level
L.Freq Lower Frequency

10.5.5.5 LOAD Local Settings

Objective:
The Load Local Settings order allows the EXE/PLN controller to apply a stored set of local settings
or the default local settings.

Activation:
1. Click LB on LOAD LOCAL SETTING button of the CONFIGURATION MENU window.
2. Click LB on the selected settings name in SLOT Name.

Result:
1. A CHOICE window is displayed with the available local settings (stored with the STORE local
setting order) for that logical CWP.

Figure 85 - Load Local Setting choice

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 124 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 86 - SLOT Name

2. The local settings values are applied.

Parameters:
SLOT slot number (from 1 to 20)

10.5.5.6 Store Local Settings – SLS

Objective:
The Store Local Settings allows the EXE/PLN controller to store the current local settings.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the STORE LOCAL SETTING button of the CONFIGURATION MENU;
2. Click LB on the slot chosen of the CHOICE window;
3. Click LB on the ENTER button.

Result:
1. A preview window is displayed with a CHOICE window showing the slot numbers and the
associated local setting names:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 125 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 87 - Store Local Setting preview window

Figure 88 - SLS – Slot Name choice window

2. The local setting name and the associated slot number are presented in the preview window;
3. The local setting is stored with the same name in the same slot.

Parameters:
SLOT slot number (from 1 to 20)

Note:
Changing the name, it is stored in the same slot with the new name and overwriting the old setting;
Changing the slot number, it is stored with the same name and overwriting the setting stored in the
specified slot.

10.5.5.7 DELETE Local Setting

Objective:
The Delete Local Settings allows the EXE/PLN controller to delete the current local settings.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 126 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Activation:
1. Click LB on the DELETE LOCAL SETTING button of the CONFIGURATION MENU.
2. Click LB on the slot chosen of the CHOICE window and click AB on ENTER button.

Result:
1. A preview window is displayed with a CHOICE window showing the slot numbers and the
associated local setting names:

Figure 89 - Delete Store Local Setting preview window

Figure 90 - SLS – Slot Name choice window

2. The slot is deleted from the stored local settings.

Parameters:
SLOT slot number (from 1 to 20)

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 127 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.5.8 ESB Vertical Size

Objective:. The ESB Vertical Size allows the controller to vertically resize the electronic strips,
either individually or globally, choosing between an off-line defined “SMALL” or “BIG” layout.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the ESB VERTICAL SIZE button of the CONFIGURATION MENU;
2. Click LB on the SMALL button;
or
Click LB on the BIG button

Result:
1. If the button SMALL was pressed then the electronics strip label is reduced
else
the electronics strip label is fully displayed.

10.5.5.9 Trajectory Cut

Objective:.The TRJ Cut allows the controller to configure the lenght of horinzontal trajectory display.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the TRJ Cut button of the CONFIGURATION MENU;
2. Click LB on the DIST value chosen of the CHOICE window;
or
Click LB on TIME button and CHOICE a selection on time lenght
3. Click LB on RESET button to cancel the configuration.

Result:
1. A dedicated choice window is displayed.
2. If the button DIST was pressed then the choice values are expressed in nautical miles, the
controller sees the trajectories for a look ahead of miles chosen starting from the last
reported point if the flight plan is not linked
else
the flight plan is linked the trajectory starting from the track position
3. If the button TIME was pressed the controller will see the trajectories for a look ahead of
minutes chosen starting from the last reported point if the flight plan is not linked
else
the flight plan is linked the trajectory starting from the track position.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 128 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

De-Activation:
Clicking on RESET button the configuration is cancelled and the trajectories are always displayed as
complete.

10.5.5.10 Login

Objective:
The ATCO is enable to access the CWP capability by means of login procedure (User Name and
Password).

Activation:
1. At the start-up of system, the LOGIN WINDOW is automatically displayed
Or
Click LB on LOGIN button of the CONFIGURATION menu window.
Result:
1. The LOGIN preview window is displayed:

Figure 91 - LOGIN window

2. After check of username and password, the user is logged. The surname of the user and
tube time is displayed on the relevant field of the LDA.

Parameters:
Username, Password.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 129 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

De-Activation:
The login is de-activate upon manual or automatic log-out execution.
An automatic Logout occurs in case the following events happens:
 When the relevant CWP goes in off-line condition;
 When a login of another user is performed on the relevant CWP (in this case the logout is
immediately followed by the performed login);
 Each time that a Physical Assignment order involving the relevant Position is performed.

The Logout order causes the record of the Tube time (close of log-in time at the sector) and the
release of the orders power.

Note:
Each time a wrong username or password is inserted, or both, an error message is displayed :
‘Login failed: Invalid credentials’.
In this case the system is blocked and many orders become un-sensitive on their menus.
After a customizable number of wrong attempts the system is blocked with Default User setting.
Upon login execution the presentation on the settings (Range Scale Presentation, Centre
Presentation, Electronic Strip Presentation, brightness for the relevant local setting) on the CWP
does not change. The settings can be stored by means of the Local Settings orders and restored in
each physical working position when the user performs the login with its username and password.

10.5.5.11 Logout

Objective:
The ATCO is enable to manually log out a CWP.

Activation:
1. Click LB on LOGOUT button of CONF menu.
Result:
1. The user is not logged anymore and cannot perform any action on SFPLs or system. Only
presentation orders are available ((Range Scale Presentation, Centre Presentation,
Electronic Strip Presentation, brightness).

10.5.5.12 Set MTCD Filter

Objective:
The Set MTCD Filter order allows to exclude an SFPL from MTCD calculation.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 130 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Activation:
1. Hook a certain SFPL under MTCD conflict and LB click on CONF MENU-> Set MTCD Filter.

Result:
1. The SFPL will be excluded from MTCD calculation and on the Flight Directory will be
displayed a red symbol on the SFPL to indicate the exclusion from SFPL.

10.5.5.13 Logical Filter Mona

Objective: The LOGICAL FILTER MONA (CLAM/RAM) button allows an eligible operator to
selectively enable/disable the MONA functions CLAM and RAM for thw logical console on which the
order is executed.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the LOGICAL FILTER MONA button of the CONFIGURATION MENU -> CLAM
button;
2. Click LB on the LOGICAL FILTER MONA button of the CONFIGURATION MENU -> RAM
button;

Result:
1. If the button CLAM of the LOGICAL FILTER MONA/CLAM was pressed
then the CLAM warnings are not displayed on SFPL linked tracks on the logical console that
executes the orders (the CLAM warnings continue to be displayed on the other logical CWP).
2. If the button RAM of the LOGICAL FILTER MONA/RAM was pressed
then the RAM warnings are not displayed on SFPL linked tracks on the logical console that
executes the orders (the RAM warnings continue to be displayed on the other logical CWP).

10.5.5.14 Suite Filter Mona

Objective: The SUITE FILTER MONA (CLAM/RAM) button allows an eligible operator to selectively
enable/disable the MONA functions CLAM and RAM for the CWP belonging to the same suite
(EXE/PLN).

Activation:
3. Click LB on the SUITE FILTER MONA button of the CONFIGURATION MENU -> CLAM
button;
4. Click LB on the SUITE FILTER MONA button of the CONFIGURATION MENU -> RAM
button;

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 131 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Result:
1. If the button CLAM of the SUITE FILTER MONA/CLAM was pressed
then the CLAM warnings are not displayed on SFPL linked tracks on the consoles belonging
to the same suite of the the one that executes the orders (the CLAM warnings continue to be
displayed on the CWP belonging to other SUITES).
2. If the button RAM of the SUITE FILTER MONA/RAM was pressed
then the RAM warnings are not displayed on SFPL linked tracks on the consoles belonging
to the same suite of the the one that executes the orders (the RAM warnings continue to be
displayed on the CWP belonging to other SUITES).

10.5.5.15 PLAYBACK

Objective:
The Playback order allows to open the Playback Control Window in order to enable/disable a
playback session.

Activation:
1. Recall the CONF MENU and click LB on PLAYBACK button of CWP.
2. Select the file to reproduce by clicking on A or B button and press play.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 132 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 92 - Playback Control Window

2. When the PLAY button turns in green colour the playback is reproduced on the CWP.

Parameters:

Buffer A/B Playback sessions


Reload Reset selection
Play Change modality from play to pause to stop
Speed Speed of playback session
Passive Change modality from passive to active
Set Date Date and time of the session

Note:
The PLAYBACK button is enabled only if the CWP is assigned to the playback environment.

10.5.5.16 SNET

Objective:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 133 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The SNET menu orders allows to enable the display of STCA and MSAW area in the GRP.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the SNET button of the CONF Menu.
2. Click LB on the STCA button or on the MSAW button.
3. Click LB on one of MAP ID.
Result:
1. The following menu appears

Figure 93 - SNET Maps menu window

2. The table of STCA and/or MSAW maps menuare opened

Figure 94 - SNET STCA/MSAW PANEL

3. The selected MAP is displayed/removed from the GRP.

Note:
For APW maps is not possible to display manually the maps. The APW maps are displayed only if
the are active in the system.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 134 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.6 Planner Menu


PLAN
DEPARTURE CLEARANCE
WITH RE-ROUTING
EN ROUTE CLEARANCE
WITH RE-ROUTING
ARRIVAL CLEARANCE
WITH RE-ROUTING
LEVEL LEVEL ASSIGMENT
ORDERS
LEVEL CLEARANCE
COORD COORD ENTRY LEVEL (PEL)
ORDERS
COORD EXIT LEVEL (XFL)
COORD FIR EXIT LEVEL (COO)
PHONE COORD (PCO)
HOLDING HOLDING INSERT
ORDERS
HOLDING CANCEL
HOLDING EXIT
TWR/APP TAC START UP
ORDERS
PUSH BACK
TAXI
LINE UP
RESET
PARKING BAY
FORMALITY CHECK
CTOT
UNDO TERMINATE to LIVE
ORDERS
LIVE to PENDING
ACTIVE to PENDING
PENDING to INACTIVE
FROM NEXT UNIT
EDIT
FUNCTION
Table 20 - Planner Menu Layout

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 135 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.6.1 Departure Clearance - DCL

Objective:
The Departure Clearance order allows to clear or clear again flight departing from a controlled
Aerodrome. This order can be done:
 by the PLN controller responsible of the first sector ACC when the flight is active and have to
be planned or re-planned;
 by the TWR/APP controller when the flight is planned.

Activation:
Select a departing SFPL and recall the PLANNER MENU, click LB on DEPARTURE &
CLEARANCE button.

Result:
The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 95 - Departure Clearance preview window

Parameters:
ETD Estimated time of departure
CFL Cleared flight level
PFL Planned flight level
SID standard instrumental departure
RWY departure runway
MODE Radar Interrogation mode
SSR SSR code

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 136 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

8 33 UHF equipment
PRNAV Precision or Basic Regional Navigation
RVSM Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum status
MDS MODE-S flag

After the input to the system:

if the input check result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDP;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Note:
when the FDPS is off, the DCL order is allowed on a reduced SFPL that becomes active.
The order can be repeated to change the departure time of the flight.
The following checks are performed:
 the planned and cleared levels must be equal to or lower than the maximum values
allowed for the aircraft type;
 the cleared level must be equal to or lower than the planned level;
 ETD must be in the range (actual time - lower bound, actual time + upper bound) where
lower and upper bounds are system parameters.

The order issued to a pending traffic provided to change the FDP flight status from Pending to
Active.

10.5.6.2 Departure with Re-routing –DCR

Objective:
The Departure Clearance with re-routing order allows to clear or clear again with a route re-routing a
flight departing from a controlled Aerodrome. The flight data can be modified.

Activation:
1. Select a departing SFPL and recall the PLANNER MENU, click LB on DEPARTURE &
CLEARANCE  WITH RE-ROUTING button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 137 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 96 - Departure with Re-routing preview window

Parameters:
ETD estimated time of departure
CFL Cleared flight level
PFL Planned flight level
SID Standard Instrumental Departure
RWY Departure runway
MODE Radar Interrogation mode
SSR SSR code
ADES Destination aerodrome
8 33 UHF equipment
PRNAV Precision or Basic Radio Navigation
RVSM Reduce Vertical Separation Minimal status
MDS MODE-S flag
REVISED Route
ROUTE

After the input to the system:

if the input check result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDP;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 138 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Note:
The planned and cleared levels must be equal to or lower than the maximum values considered for
the aircraft type.

The order issued to a pending traffic provided to change the FDP flight status from Pending to
Active.

10.5.6.3 En-Route Clearance –RCL

Objective:
The en-Route Clearance order allows to clear or clear again a flight inbounding from an adjacent
controlled airspace.
This order can be performed:
 by the PLN controller responsible of the first sector ACC when the flight is active and to be
planned, or to be planned again;
 by the PLN controller responsible of the sector ACC or APP, when the flight is planned.

Activation:
Select the flight and recall the PLANNER MEN, click LB on EN-ROUTE  CLEARANCE button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 97 - En Route Clearance preview window

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 139 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Parameters:
INFIX inbound fix
ETO estimated time over inbound fix
CFL Cleared flight level
PFL Planned flight level
PEL Planned entry level
MODE Radar Interrogation mode
SSR SSR code
8 33 UHF equipment
PRNAV Precision or Basic Regional Navigation
RVSM Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum
status
MDS MODE-S flag

After the input to the system:

if the input check result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDP;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Note:
When the FDPS is off, the RCL order is allowed on a reduced SFPL that becomes active.
The order can be repeated in order to change the inbound time of the flight.
The inbound crossing, planned and cleared levels must be equal to or lower than the maximum
values foreseen for the aircraft type.
The order issued to a pending traffic cause to change the FDP flight status from Pending to Active.

10.5.6.4 En-Route with Re-routing –RCR

Objective:
The En-Route Clearance with Re-routing order allows the PLN to clear or re-clear with a route re-
routing a flight inbounding from an adjacent controlled airspace and re-route it.

Activation:
1. Select a flight and recall the PLANNER MENU, click LB on EN-ROUTE  WITH RE-
ROUTING button.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 140 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 98 - EnRoute Clearance with Re-routing preview window

Parameters:
SRFIX Start of re-routing point
ETO ETO start of re-routing point
XLV Start of re-routing point crossing level
PFL Planned flight level
CFL Cleared flight level
MODE Radar Interrogation mode
SSR SSR code
ADES Destination aerodrome
8 33 UHF equipment
PRNAV Precision or Basic Regional Navigation
RVSM Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum
status
MDS MODE-S Flag
FR Flight Rules
ROUTE Route

After the input to the system:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 141 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

if the input check result is OK;


then the FIX appears and it’s fixed on the world co-ordinate which it refers to.
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Note:
The order issued to a pending traffic cause to change the FDP flight status from Pending to Active.

10.5.6.5 Change Type - RCR

Objective:
The Change Type order allows the PLN to change the Flight Rules for a correlated flight in active or
live status.

Activation:
1. Select a flight and recall the PLANNER MENU, click LB on EN-ROUTE CHANGE TYPE
button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 99 - Change type preview window

Parameters:
TYPE Aircraft type
FR Flight Rules
XLV Start of re-routing point crossing level
PFL Planned flight level
CFL Cleared flight level

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 142 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

After the input to the system:


if the input check result is OK;
then the order is sent to FDP;
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

10.5.6.6 Arrival Clearance–ACL

Objective:
The Arrival Clearance order allows to clear or to clear again a flight arriving to a controlled
aerodrome.
This order can be performedby the PLN controller responsible of the sector APC when the flight is
active and planned.

Activation:
1. Select a flight and recall the PLANNER MENU, click LB on ARRIVAL  CLEARANCE
button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 100 - Arrival Clearance preview window

Parameters:
ETA estimated exit time from the feeding point (the feeding point is the first point of the STAR).

After the input to the system:

if the input check resultis OK;

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 143 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

then the order is sent to FDP;


the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Note:
The ETO/ATO fields corresponding to the POINT of the strip could be modified after the order
execution.

10.5.6.7 Arrival with Re-routing– ACR

Objective:
The Arrival Clearance with Re-routing order allows the PLN controller to change the landing RWY
for live traffic.

Activation:
1. Select a flight and recall the PLANNER MENU, click LB on ARRIVAL WITH RE-ROUTING
button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 101 - Arrival with Re-Routing preview window

Parameters:
STAR = Standard Instrument Arrival
RWY = Arrival RunWaY

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 144 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

After the input to the system:

if the input check resultis OK;


then the order is sent to FDP;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

10.5.6.8 Level Assignment –LVA

Objective:
Level Assignment order allows to modify the planned flight level. This order can be performed by the
PLN controller responsible of the sector ACC or APP when the flight is active and planned.

Activation:
1. Select a flight, recall the PLANNER MENU and click LB on LEVELS ORDERS  LEVEL
ASSIGNMENT button;

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 102 - Level Assignment preview window

Parameters:
PFL Planned flight
level

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 145 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

CFL Cleared flight


level

After the input to the system:

if the input checks’ result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDP;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Note:
The new planned and new cleared levels must be equal to or lower than the maximum values
considered for the aircraft type.

10.5.6.9 Level Clearance–CFL

Objective:
Level Clearance order allows to modify the cleared flight levels. This order can be done by the PLN
controller responsible of the sector ACC or APP

Activation:
1. Select a flight and recall the PLANNER MENU, click LB LEVEL ORDERS & LEVEL
CLEARANCE button;
Or
Click LB on the CFL of a strip and select with click LB on LEVEL Choice.

Result:
2. The following preview window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 146 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 103 - Level Clearance choice window

Parameters:
CFL Cleared flight level

After the input to the system:

if the input checks’ result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDP;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

10.5.6.10 Coord Entry/Exit Level – PEL/XFL

Objective:
The planned entry level order allows the downstream planner controller initiate/respondto a level
coordination with the upstream sector for an SFPL that is foreseen to enter in its airspace (SFPL in
AIS status).
The exit flight level order allows the upstream planner controller to initiate/respond to a level
coordination with the downstream controller for a controlled SFPL.

Activation:
Coordination started from the upstream sector (ais track):
1. Select a coordinated inbound AIS SFPL and recall the PLANNER MENU, click LB on
COORD. ORDERS MENU  COORD ENTRY LEVEL (PEL) button;
Or
ClickLB on PEL field of the electronic strip, radar label, lists.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 147 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

2. The downstream sector clicks on the green XFL field.


3. The downstream sector operator clicks LB on ACCEPT button.
Or
The downstream sector operator clicks LB on REJECT button.
Or
The downstream sector operator clicks LB on another level value to counter-propose the
level.

Coordination started from the downstream sector (controlled track):


4. Select a coordinated controlled SFPL and recall the PLANNER MENU, click LB on COORD.
ORDERS MENU  COORD EXIT LEVEL (XFL) button;
Or
ClickLB onXFL field of the electronic strip, radar label, lists.
5. The upstream sector operator clicks on the magenta PEL field.
6. The upstream sector operator clicks LB on ACCEPT button.
Or
The upstream sector operator clicks LB on REJECT button.
Or
The upstream sector operator clicks LB on another level value to counter-propose the level.
Result:
Coordination started from the upstream sector (ais track):
1. On the upstream sector the PEL fields is displayed in cyan colour and the COORD OUT
window is opened.
On the downstream sector the XFL fields is displayed in magenta colour and the COORD IN
window is opened.
2. A mask is displayed to accept/reject or counter-propose the level.
3. Upon ACCEPT, the level (PEL/XFL) coordinated is applied to trajectory and displayed in
default colour on upstream and downstream position (light pink on upstream, white on
downstream) and the COORD IN/COORD OUT windows are closed.
Upon REJECT, the last coordinated level is displayed on the CWP and the indication of
reject is displayed on line 0 of the track label and on coordination window. The upstream
sector is enabled to acknowledge the reject indication by clicking on it.
Upon counter-proposal of the level on the downstream sector the level is displayed in cyan
colour and the COORD OUT window is opened; on the upstream sector the level is
displayed in magenta colour and the COORD IN window is opened. The upstream operator
is only enabled to ACCEPT or REJECT the level after a counter proposal:

Figure 104 - ACCEPT/REJECT level

Coordination started from the downstream sector (controlled track):

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 148 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

4. On the downstream sector the XFL fields is displayed in cyan colour and the COORD OUT
window is opened.
On the upstream sector the XFL fields is displayed in magenta colour and the COORD IN
window is opened.

5. A mask is displayed to accept/reject or counter-propose the level.


6. Upon ACCEPT, the level (PEL/XFL) coordinated is applied to trajectory and displayed in
default colour on upstream and downstream position (light pink on upstream, white on
downstream) and the COORD IN/COORD OUT windows are closed.
Upon REJECT, the last coordinated level is displayed on the CWP and the indication of
reject is displayed on line 0 of the track label and on coordination window. The downstream
sector is enabled to acknowledge the reject indication by clicking on it.
Upon counter-proposal of the level on the upstream sector the level is displayed in cyan
colour and the COORD OUT window is opened; on the downstream sector the level is
displayed in magenta colour and the COORD IN window is opened. The downstream
operator is only enabled to ACCEPT or REJECT the level after a counter proposal.

10.5.6.11 Coord. Orders: Coordinated Out – COO

Objective:
The Coordinated Out (COO) order allows the planner controller to propose the level at which a flight
will be exchanged to the adjacent FIR. It must be performed only by the last sector in FIR.

Activation:
1. Select the flight and recall the PLANNER MENU/COORD. ORDERS MENU, click LB on
COORD FIR EXIT LEVEL button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 105 - Coordinate Out preview window

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 149 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Parameters:
CALLSIGN flight identification
FIX referred fix
ETO estimated time over point
XFL Exit flight level
SPL supplementary level
CRC crossing condition
A Above
B Below
‘’ Equal
TX forced transmission of OLDI-ACT
Y Yes
N No

After the input to the system:


if the input’s checks are OK;
then the order is sent to FDPS, the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic
List and coordination to the adjacent FIR is in progress, i.e.:
else the related diagnostic is displayed in the Diagnostic List

The XFL field of the track label, electronic strip and lists related to the flight change to coordination
out color while waiting to receive a LAM message from the receiving FIR;
The FDP updates the trajectory and all the flight information.
When the LAM message is received the coordination inter-FIR ends. The XFL field in label, strip and
lists assume the default color.
If the LAM message is not received the level coordinated is presented in Not OK color

10.5.6.12 Phone Coord – PCO

Objective:
The phone coordinated level change order allows the controller to propose a level at which a flight
will be exchanged to the adjacent FIR. It must be performed only by the last sector in FIR.

Activation:
1. Select the flight, recall the PLANNER MENU and click LB on COORD. ORDERS MENU 
PHONE COORD. button:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 150 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 106 - Phone Coordination preview window

After the input to the system:

if the input’s checks are OK;


then the order is sent to FDP, the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic
List and phone coordination to the adjacent FIR is in progress, i.e.:
the XFL field of the track label, electronic strip and lists related to the flight, will change
to coordination out color attribute.
The FDPS updates the trajectory and all the flight information.
else the related diagnostic is displayed in the Diagnostic List

10.5.6.13 Holding Orders - HOL


Objective:
The Holding Insert order allows to insert a flight in en-route holding.
This order can be done by the PLN controller responsible of the actual sector ACC when the flight is
planned and live.

Activation:
1. Select a flight and recall the PLANNER MENU and click LB on HOLDING ORDERS 
HOLDING INSERT button.

Result:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 151 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 107 - Holding Insert preview window

Parameters:
HFIX holding fix
HLD Exit estimated exit time from holding
point

After the input to the system:

if the input check result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDP;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Note:
the following checks are performed:
 the flight must be IFR;
 the holding point must be in the trajectory;
 the estimated exit time from holding point must be equal to or greater than the estimated
time over the holding point.

10.5.6.14 Holding Cancel- HOC


Objective:
The Holding Cancel order allows to cancel a previous HOL order.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 152 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

This order can be done BY the PLN controller responsible of the actual sector ACC when the flight is
active, planned and live.

Activation:
1. Select a flight and recall the PLANNER MENU, click LB on HOLDING ORDERS 
HOLDING CANCEL button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 108 - Holding cancel preview window

Parameters:
HFX holding fix

After the input to the system:

If the input check resultis OK;


Then the order is sent to FDPS;
The related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.
Else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Note:
the following checks are performed on the new SFPL:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 153 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

 the flight must be IFR;


 the flight must be previously put in holding on that point;
 the holding point must be in the trajectory.

10.5.6.15 Holding Exit –HOE

Objective:
The Holding Exit order allows to report the exit of a flight from the holding route.

Activation:
1. Select a flight, recall the PLANNER MENU, click LB on HOLDING ORDERS button and LB
on HOLDING EXIT button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 109 - Holding Exit preview window

Parameters:
HLDE actual time on exiting from holding
XLV crossing level

After the input to the system:

if the input check result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDP;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 154 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Note:
The following checks are performed on the new SFPL:
 the flight must be IFR;
 the flight must be in holding;
 the actual time on exit from holding must be equal to or greater than the actual time;
 the crossing level on exit from holding must be equal to or lower than the maximum value
allowed for the aircraft type;

10.5.6.16 Start Up (TWR/APP)

Objective:
The Start Up order allows to issue a start up procedure for the selected flight.

Activation:
1. Select the departing SFPL and click LB PLANNER MENU ->TWR/APP ORDERS-> TAC ->
START UP button

Result:
1. In the RO field of the relevant flight item of the Departure List is displayed the string “ST” in
blue color and the system computes a new ETD as Startup Time(system time) + Taxi Time
(VSP according to RWY)

Note:
The order is available if the selected flight is a departing Flight in Pending or Activate status.

10.5.6.17 Push back (TWR/APP)

Objective:
The PUSH BACK order allows to issue a push back procedure for the selected flight.

Activation:
1. Select the departing SFPL and click LB PLANNER MENU -> TWR/APP ORDERS-> TAC ->
PUSH BACK button.

Result:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 155 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1. In the RO field of the relevant flight item of the Departure List is displayed the string “TX” in
yellow color and the system computes a new ETD as Push Back Time + Taxi Time.

Note:
The order is available if the selected flight is a Departing flight in Active status.

10.5.6.18 Taxi (TWR/APP)

Objective:
The Taxi order allows to issue a taxi procedure for the selected flight.

Activation:
1. Select the departing SFPL and click LB PLANNER MENU -> TWR/APP ORDERS-> TAC ->
TAXI button.

Result:
1. In the RO field of the relevant flight item of the Departure List is displayed the string “TX” in
yellow color and system computes a new ETD as current time + Taxi Time(VSP).

Note:
The order is available if the selected flight is a Departing flight in Active status.

10.5.6.19 Reset

Objective:
The RESET order allows the Tower controller to undo the last order between TAXI clearance,
START UP clearance and Push Back clearance.
Activation:
1. Select the departing SFPL and click LB PLANNER MENU -> TWR/APP ORDERS-> TAC ->
RESET button

Result:
1. As soon as the RESET order has been performed the last order between TAXI clearance,
START UP clearance and Push Back clearance is annulled.

In the RO field of the relevant flight item of the Departure List is displayed the string with the greatest
priority between the last executed orders, the following priority must be considered:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 156 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

 Taxi (High priority)


 Push Back (Medium priority)
 Start up (Low priority)

Note:
The order is available if the selected flight is a Departing flight.

10.5.6.20 Parking Bay - EPB

Objective:
The Parking Bay allocation order allows the PLN controller to assign to the flight the Aerodrome
parking bay.

Activation:
1. Select a flight and recall the PLANNER MENU, click LB on TWR/APP ORDERS 
PARKING BAY button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed.

Figure 110 - Parking Bay preview window

Parameters:
PKB Parking bay number

After the input to the system:

if the input check result is OK;

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 157 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

then the PB number is associated to the flight.


else a message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.

10.5.6.21 Calculated Take Off Time - CTOT

Objective:
The CTOT order allows to the controller to insert the Calculated Take Off Time for the flight hooked.

Activation:
1. Select the flight and recall the PLANNER MENU and click LB on TWR/APP ORDERS 
CTOT button,
2. Insert CTOT value and click on enter button

Result:
1. The CTOT window is displayed:

Figure 111 - CTOT window

2. The CTOT value is applied.

Parameters:
CTOT Calculated Take Off Time

10.5.6.22 Terminated to Live – TCN

Objective:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 158 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The Terminated to Live order allows the PLN controller to change the status transition from
Terminated to Live.

Activation:
1. Select the flight, recall the PLANNER MENU and the UNDO ORDERS submenu, click LB on
the TERMINATED to LIVE button.

Result:
1. The flight status reverts to live.

Note:
The order will be available only if the relevant flight has been manually terminated.

10.5.6.23 Live to Pending – LCN

Objective:
The Live to Pending order allows the PLN controller to change the state transition from Live to
Pending.

Activation:
1. Select the flight and recall the PLANNER MENU and the UNDO ORDERS submenu, click LB
on the LIVE to PENDING button.

Result:
1. The flight status reverts to Pending.

De-Activation:
Issue a clearance for the relevant flight and then a report for the relevant flight.

10.5.6.24 Active to Pending – PCN

Objective:
The Active to Pending order allows the PLN controller to changethe state transition fromActive to
Pending.

Activation:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 159 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1. Select the flight,recall the PLANNER MENU and the UNDO ORDERS submenu, click LB on
the ACTIVE to PENDING button.

Result:
1. The flight status reverts to pending.

10.5.6.25 Pending to Inactive– PEC

Objective:
The Pending to Inactive order allows the PLN controller to revert a pending flight to the inactive
status.

Activation:
1. Select the flight,recall the PLANNER MENU and the UNDO ORDERS submenu, click LB on
the PENDING to INACTIVE button.

Result:
1. The flight status revert to inactive.

10.5.6.26 Undo: From Next Unit - UNSMT

Objective:
From Next Unit order allows the PLN controller to change the flight status from next unit.

Activation:
1. Select the flight,recall the PLANNER MENU and the UNDO ORDERS submenu, click LB on
the FROM NEXT UNIT button.

Result:
1. The flight status change from the next unit.

10.5.6.27 Edit Function

Objective:
The Edit Function allow the ATCO to graphically re-route the SFPL trajectory. Otherwise it allow the
operator to edit a tentative trajectory, submit it to the MTCD and accept it as the new updated
system trajectory.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 160 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Activation:
1. Select a flight, recall the PLANNER MENU and click LB on EDIT FUNCTION button.

Result:
1. The trajectory of the flight is displayed in orange on the GRP and the cursor change shape.
Fixes are identified by a small circle and a label with information about name and Estimate
time over.
A menu containing the following button is also displayed:

EDIT Apply the modification to the route and exit route editing mode
TRY submit all the route modification to the MTCD.

The following edit action are available

 P&H.DRAG LB an existing fix to the desired point on the map to modify the position of that
reporting point in the route
 Click LB on an existing FIX to delete from the route
 Click LB on a route segment to create a new waypoint

After the route modification the new trajectory leg or fix is highlighted in orange.

The following action are possible:

 Click on ENTER button to apply the modification to the route without MTCD control. The
modified route is sent to FDP and the route editing mode is close.
 Click on TRY button to submit the new trajectory to the MTCD control. If any MTCD conflicts
are created, with the route modification, the message “NO DATA RECEIVED FROM MTCD” is
displayed into the DIAGNOSTIC LIST.Then the operator can to click on ENTER button to
apply the route modification.

If a MTCD conflict is created, with the route modification, the MTCD Tentative List is displayed with
the relevant information of conflict. The DPTs of the flights in MTCD conflict are showed on the
GRP.

Note:
The first fix of the displayed trajectory cannot be modified.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 161 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 112 - Edit Function route

10.5.7 Executive Menu

EXE
ASSUME
TRANSFER
TRANSFER.FREE
CORRELATE
DECORRELATE
MISSED APPROCH
REPORT ORDER TAKE OFF REP
POSITION REP
LANDING REP
ESTIMATE REVISION
CHANGE SID
CHANGE STAR
LAST VACATED LEVEL
GPW PRESENTATION 11R
29R

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 162 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

11L
29L
QNH MENU QNH ASSIGNMENT/QNH
SELECTION
LOCAL FLIGHT FILTER TCA4 Enable/Disable STCA single flight
Enable/Disable MSAW single flight
Enable/Disable APW single flight
Enable/Disable APAM single flight
5
GLOBAL FLIGHT FILTER MONA Enable/Disable RAM global filter for
single flight
Enable/Disable CLAM global filter for
single flight
Table 21 - Executive Menu Layout

10.5.7.1 Assume of Control – AOC

Objective:
The Assume order allows assuming the control of the flight/identify the track: the system assigns the
flight to the first responsible sector when the flight is planned. So the EXE controller responsible of
the first flight sector has to identify the flight.

Activation:
1. Select the tentative or handover receiving flight, recall the EXECUTIVE MENU and click LB
on the ASSUME button;
Or
Click LB on the callsign of the linked track.

Result:
1. The “tentative” or “handover receiving” track becomes “controlled”;

4
Upon enable of the filter, the row of the relevant alarm in the cascade menu is displayed in red color. Upon
disable of the filter, the row of the relevant alarm in the cascade menu is displayed in default color.
5
Upon enable of the filter, the row of the relevant alarm in the cascade menu is displayed in red color. Upon
disable of the filter, the row of the relevant alarm in the cascade menu is displayed in default color.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 163 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Note:
The handover procedure can be aborted by entering AOC in the transferring sector.

10.5.7.2 Transfer– TOC

Objective:
The Transfer of Control order allows the EXE controller who is the actual responsible of the flight to
transfer the control of the flight to the ATCO controlling the next sector in trajectory for the selected
SFPL.

Activation:
1. Select a flight, recall the EXECUTIVE MENU and click LB on TRANSFER button;
Or
Click LB on the Callsign of a controlled linked track and select TRANSFER.

Result:
1. The CWP automatically identifies, by means of the developed flight trajectory, the receiving
sector and the referred flight switches to the handover state:
a. In the transferring sector the track label and the Callsign field of the electronic strip
and lists related to the flight, change color in handover out colour (cyan).
b. In the receiving sector the track label and the Callsign field of the electronic strip and
lists related to the flight, change color in handover in colour (magenta) and the ATCO
is enabled to perform the AOC order on the SFPL.

Note:
The handover procedure ends when the receiving CWP performs the AOC order.
the handover procedure can be aborted by entering AOC in the transferring sector.
In case the handover is executed when the track is in coast state, the flight will be removed from the
CSL of the transferring sector and, after the AOC, inserted in the CSL of the receiving sector.
If the trajectory of the SFPL does not foresee a next sector or the SFPL is a VFR or not checked,
upon execution of TOC order the system will propose a TOF choice window (please refer to §
10.5.7.3)

10.5.7.3 Free Transfer of Control – TOF

Objective:
The Free Transfer of Control order allows the EXE controller who is the actual responsible of the
flight to transfer the control of the above flight to a specific sector (who will do the AOC order), even
if the sector is not in theSFPL trajectory.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 164 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Activation:
1. Select a flight, recall the EXECUTIVE MENU and click LB on TRANSFER OF FREE button;
Or
Click LB on the Callsign of a controlled linked track and select TRANSFER OF FREE.

2. The ATCO select a sector for the transfer of the SFPL.

Result:
1. The choice is showed with the list of sector as follows:

Figure 113 - TOF Choice

2. The CWP propose the SFPL to the selected receiving sector and the referred flight switches
to the handover state:
a. In the transferring sector the track label and the Callsign field of the electronic strip and
lists related to the flight, change color in handover out colour (cyan).
b. In the receiving sector the track label and the Callsign field of the electronic strip and lists
related to the flight, change color in handover in colour (magenta) and the ATCO is
enabled to perform the AOC order on the SFPL.
Note:
The handover procedure ends when the receiving CWP performs the AOC order.
the handover procedure can be aborted by entering AOC in the transferring sector.
In case the handover is executed when the track is in coast state, the flight will be removed from the
CSL of the transferring sector and, after the AOC, inserted in the CSL of the receiving sector.

10.5.7.4 Track Correlation - INI

Objective:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 165 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The Track Correlation order allows the EXE controller to correlate a mismatched or unmatched flight
plan to an uncorrelated track

Activation:
1. Select a flight, recall the EXECUTIVE MENU and click LB on CORRELATE button;
2. Click LB on the position symbol of the TRACK.

Result:
1. The pointer symbol changes.
2. The track becomes "controlled".

10.5.7.5 Track Decorrelation - DEC

Objective:
The track Decorrelation order allows the EXE controller to decorrelate a controlled track from the
associated flight plan.

Activation:
1. Select a flight correlated to a track, recall the EXECUTIVE MENU and click LB on
DECORRELATE button.

Result:
1. The track becomes "pending".

10.5.7.6 Missed Approach - MIS


Objective:
The Missed Approach order allows to assign one of the available paths and eventual time and
holding in order to re-route the selected flight.

Activation:
1. Select a correlated arrival SFPL, recall the EXECUTIVE MENU and click LB on MISSED
APPROACH button.
2. Select a Fix and a level for the Missed Approach.

Result:
1. The MISSED APPROACH Preview is displayed.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 166 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 114 - MISSED APPROACH window

After the input to the system, the SFPL is set in Missed Approach state and the trajectory is re-
calculated.

Parameters:
MAF MISSED APPROACH FIX
MAL MISSED ALTITUDE

Note:
The order is available if the relevant flight is inbound, controlled, correlated and the owner is an
APP/TWR sector.

10.5.7.7 Report Orders

Activation:
1. Select a flight, recall the EXECUTIVE MENU, there is a cascade button REPORT ORDERS;
clicking on it the following orders are displayed:

Figure 115 - Report order submenu

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 167 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.7.7.1 Take Off Report - TKF

Objective:
The Take-off report order allows inserting the take-off report.
It can be performed by the EXE controller responsible of the TWR (in case of controlled Aerodrome),
APP (in case of controlled TMA) or first sector ACC (in case of Aerodrome and TMA not controlled),
when the flight is active.

Activation:
1. Select a departing SFPL, click LB on Exe Menu -> Report Orders -> Take off Report.
2. Input ATD and click LB on enter button.
Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 116 - Take Off Report window

2. The takeoff report is executed (upon FDP checks) and the trajectory is recalculated
accordingly.

Parameters:
ATD actual time of departure

Note:
ATD must be equal to or lower than the actual time.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 168 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.7.7.2 Position Report - REP

Objective:
The Position report order is used to insert manually a position report.
Activation:
1. Select a departing SFPL, click LB on Exe Menu -> Report Orders -> Position Report.
2. Input ATD and click LB on enter button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 117 - Report Preview window

2. The position report is executed (upon FDP checks) and the trajectory is recalculated
accordingly.

Parameters:
FIX Referred fix point
ATO Actual time over
XLV Crossing level

Note:
The referred point must be the next to be flown in the trajectory.
ATO must be equal to or lower than the actual time.
The crossing level must be equal to or lower than the maximum value considered for the aircraft
type.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 169 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.7.7.3 Landing Report - LND

Objective:
The Landing report order is used to insert manually a landing report.

Activation:
1. Select a live landing SFPL, click LB on Exe Menu -> Report Orders ->Landing Report.
2. Input ATL and click LB on enter button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 118 - Landing Report Preview window

2. The landing report is executed (upon FDP checks) and the trajectory is recalculated
accordingly.

Parameters:
ATL actual time of landing

After the input to the system:

if the input checks’ result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDP;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 170 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Note:
ATL must be equal to or lower than the actual time. The order is available if the relevant flight is a
TWR sector.

10.5.7.7.4 Estimate Revision - REV

Objective:
The estimate revision order is used to insert a revision of the SFPL on the trajectory.

Activation:
1. Select an SFPL, clicks LB on Exe Menu -> Report Orders ->Estimate Revision.
2. The operator enters the values in the preview and clicks on ENTER button.
Or
The operator clicks on TRY button, inserts the tentative values to be probed and then click
on ENTER.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 119 - Estimate Revision preview window

2. The estimate revision is executed (upon FDP checks) and the trajectory is recalculated
accordingly.
Or
Upon click on TRY button, the system goes on ‘What if’ mode. In ‘What if’ mode, upon click
on ENTER button, the values are submitted to FDP and MTCD calculation to evaluate
possible conflict. The system returns with:
- No conflict in Diagnostic list or,

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 171 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

- Tentative conflict displayd in Track label, MTCD tentative list, Displayed


Trajectory.

Parameters:
FIX referred fix point
ETO estimated time over
XLV crossing level

After the input to the system:

if the input check result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDP and the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic
List.
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

10.5.7.8 Change Sid – CSI

Objective:
The CSI order allows the controller to change the SID of a selected flight.

Activation:
1. Recall the EXECUTIVE menu and click LB on CHANGE SID button.
2. Select one SID Identifier.

Result:
1. The choice containing the SID Identifier for the selected flight will be displayed.

Figure 120 - Change SID choice

2. The SID (after FDP check) is applied to the trajectory.

After the input to the system:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 172 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

If No error has been found


Then The Flight data will be updated
Else An error will be displayed in the diagnostic List.

Note:
This order can be issued acting with LB on the SID field of the label track (only APP sector) or
aching by means the mouse on the relevant field of the Departure List.

10.5.7.9 Change Star – CSA

Objective:
The CSA order allows the controller to change the STAR of a selected Flight.

Activation:
1. Recall the EXECUTIVE menu and click LB on CHANGE STAR button.
2. Select one STAR Identifier.

Result:
1. The choice containing the STAR Identifier for the relevant Flight will be displayed.

Figure 121- Change STAR choice

2. The STAR (after FDP check) is applied to the trajectory.

After the input to the system:

If No error has been found


Then The Flight data will be updated
Else An error will be displayed in the diagnostic List.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 173 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.7.10 Last Vacated Level– LVL

Objective:
Last vacated level order allows the EXE controller to insert the flight level value in the label
presentation in case a fault of mode C occurs.

Activation:
1. Select a flight,recall the EXECUTIVE menu clicking LB button, then click LAST VACATED
LEVEL button;
Or
Click LB on the LVL field of the label, only if the track quote information is absent.

Result:
1. the following preview window is displayed:

Figure 122 - Last Vacated Level preview window

Parameters:
LVL Last Vacated Level

After the input to the system:

if the input checks’ result is OK;


then the Flight level value inserted is displayed on the label and the TCA function considers this
last value for the detection of conflicts.

De-Activation:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 174 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Automatically when the new value of mode C is occurs.

10.5.7.11 GPW Presentation


Objective:
The GPW presentation allows the ATCo to follow the flight plan on the cone of approaching on the
selected RWY.

Activation:
Select a Flight, on Tower position, recal the EXECUTIVE MENU there is a cascade button GPW
PRESENTATION; clicking on it the next list is showed:

Figure 123 - GPW selection of RWY

Clicking on each runway a kind of small GRP is opened.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 175 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 124 - Example of RUNWAY

In the upper section of the picture the trajectory of the track is showed from the vertical point of view.
The distance of the graphic is measured in FL, flight level.
In the lower section of the picture the trajectory of the track is showed from the horizontal point of
view. The distance of the graphic is measured in NM, nautilus miles.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 176 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Clicking on SETTING there are other two choice:


 DIRECTION, changes the direction of the map.
 MAP, draw map on the picture.

Figure 125 - Setting Menu

The menu opened clicking on MAPS – GEOGRAPHIC shows the next picture:

Figure 126 - Maps Menu

Clicking on LN it is possible to choose how many Lines are showed in the map.

Figure 127 - Line

10.5.7.12 QNH Menu

Objective:
The QNH MENU order allows the CWP Supervisor to assign the value of QNH (barometric
pressure) Globally or locally to the airport selected.

Activation:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 177 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1. Select a flight, recall the EXECUTIVE MENU and click LB on the QNH MENU - QNH
ASSIGNMENT button.
2. The controller selects the GLOB if he wants to modify the global QNH. Else the controller
selects the identifier of an airport from the list to modify the local QNH. Then insert the QNH
value and clicks on ENTER.

Results:
1. The QNH Assignment preview window appears:

Figure 128 - QNH Assignment preview window

Figure 129 - QNH Selection preview window

2. According to the choice of controller supervisor :


a. The global QNH value is applied for all CWPs.
b. The local QNH value is valid for all the CWPs where the relevant Airport has been set.

Parameters:
AIRP Airport
QNH Barometric pressure
VALUE = QNH value

After the input to the system:

if the input check’s result is ok;


then the order is sent to FDP;

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 178 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.


else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Notes:
At system start-up the QNH value is automatically set at 1013.2.
The last inserted QNH value, “global” or “local”, is used to correct the Mode C altitude.
On each position the controller is able to enable the presentation on the SDMA of the following
information for all the airports controlled by the sectors associated to the position itself (i.e. Airport-
Id, Related QNH value, Related Transition Level).

10.5.8 Flight Menu

FLIGHT
FPL INSERT

FPL AMEND

CANCELLATION FPL CANCEL (CONFIRM)


FPL TERMINATION
TERMINATED COPY

CALLSIGN MENU FORCED ACT


COF
ROF
NEXT UNIT
FROM NEXT UNIT
FPL EXTENDED DATA

FPL MESSAGE

TEXT

SSR SSR CODE ASSIGMENT


SSR CODE RELEASE
FLIGHT EQUIPMENT MODO S EQUIP

833

RVSM

BRNAV

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 179 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

FULL EQP

TRAJECTORY HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
FFP
FPL ICAO INSERT
INACTIVE FLIGHT BROWSE

FPL PASSIVE CANCEL

FPL PASSIVE AMEND

REG. NUMBER
IDENTIFY

FAST IDENTIFY

PAPER STRIP

EMPTY STRIP

Table 22 - Flight Data Menu Layout

10.5.8.1 FPL Insert - DFI

Objective:
The Data Flight Insert order allows the PLN controller to enters a new flight plan as “pending”.

Activation:
1. Recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on FPL INSERT button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 180 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 130 - Data Flight Insert preview window

Parameters:
CALLSIGN Flight identification
ADEP Departure aerodrome
ADES Destination aerodrome
EOBT Off block time
TYPE Aircraft type
TAS True air speed
PFL Planned flight level
ROUTE Route
SCT First owner sector
EET Estimated elapsed time
FR Flight rule
ETF/D Estimated time on FIR/Departure
8 33 UHF equipment
PRNAV Precision or Basic Regional Navigation
RVSM Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum
status
MDS Mode S Equipment

After the input to the system:

if the input check resultis OK;

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 181 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

then the order is sent to FDP;


the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Notes:
The following checks are performed on the new flight plan:

1. the new flight plan is initially submitted to avalidity check, consisting of FORMAT ANALYSIS
(with the exception of the flight route) in accordance with the ICAO PANS/ATM 4444;
2. the planned flight level and the true air speed must be equal to or lower than the maximum
values considered for the aircraft type;
3. if the flight plan is a VFR the estimated elapsed time must be equal to or lower than 24
hours;
4. the relation (actual time - lower delta time  off-block time  actual time + upper delta time)
must be satisfied by input parameters, where upper and lower delta time are system
parameters.

When the FDPS is off the new flight plan inserted with the DFI order is considered as reduced and in
pending state.

To insert the flight plan the controller must specify the first responsible sector while the route is
optional.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 182 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.8.2 FPL Amend – DFA

Objective:
The Data Flight Amend order allows the PLN controller to modify a pending flight plan.

Activation:
1. Select a flight, recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on FPL AMEND button.

Result:
1. the following preview window is displayed:

Figure 131 - Data Flight Amend preview window

Parameters:
CALLSIGN Flight identification
ADEP Departure aerodrome
ADES Destination aerodrome
EOBT Off block time
TYPE Aircraft type
TAS True air speed
PFL Planned flight level
SCT First own sector
EET Estimated elapsed time
FR Flight rule
ETF/D Estimated time on FIR/Departure

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 183 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

8 33 UHF equipment
PRNAV Precision or Basic Regional Navigation
RVSM Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum
status
MDS Mode S equipment
ROUTE Route

All fields in the preview window, excluded the callsign and flight rule, can be modified.

After the input to the system:


if the input check resultis OK;
then the order is sent to FDPS;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List (Order sent to FDP).
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Notes:
the following checks are performed:
 the planned flight level and the true air speed must be equal to or lower than the maximum
values foreseen for the aircraft type;
 if the flight plan is a VFR the estimated elapsed time must be equal to or lower than 24
hours.
 the relation (actual time - lower delta time  off-block time  actual time + upper delta time)
must be satisfied by input parameters, where upper and lower delta time are system
parameters.

The DFA order can be performed on reduced flights.

10.5.8.3 FPL Cancel– FCN

Objective:
The Flight Plan Cancellation order allows the EXE/PLN controller to delete a flight from the system
data base.

Activation:
1. Select a flight and click on the FLIGHT DATA MENU and select CANCELLATION.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 184 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

2. LB on FPL CANCEL and click on CONFIRM.

Result:
1. The following menu are displayed:

Figure 132 - Cancellation submenu

Figure 133 - FPL Cancel confirm button

2. The flight is cancelled and sent to the FDP Archived list with the last FDP State.

Note:
The Flight Cancel order does not perform a Termination order on the flight, it deletes the flight. If the
flight has to be terminated use the Flight PlanTermination order instead (ref. 10.5.8.4).
Besides, an automatic cancellation is possible as following:
 a flight is held in the "terminate" status for a predefined time (system parameter), after
that it is cancelled, i.e. removed from the FDPS and CWPs databases;
 if no outbound/landing report is provided, the FDPS automatically cancels the flight a
predefined time (system parameter) after the estimated time of outbound/landing.
This is applied to pending, active lives and terminated flights;
after the final coasting of the correlated track as well as a predefined time (system parameter) after
ETI/ETD.

10.5.8.4 FPL Termination– FTR

Objective:
The FPL-Flight Plan Termination order allows an EXE controller to terminate a non “reduced” flight.

Activation:
1. Select the flight, recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on CANCELLATION  FPL
TERMINATION button.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 185 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Result:
1. The status of the selected flight change to terminate and after some minutes (system
parameter) is automatically deleted from the system

10.5.8.5 Terminated Copy – TCY

Objective:
The Terminated Copy order allows the PLN controller to insert a new Flight Plan having the same
flight data of the selected terminated flight.

Activation:
1. Select a terminated SFPL, recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on the
TERMINATED COPY button.

Result:
1. An FFP Mask is displayed with all the fields pre-filled with the data of the selected flight.

Figure 134 - Terminated Copy window

The input of the new flight Plan data is enabled.

Note:
The order will be available only if the relevant flight has been automatically terminated.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 186 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.8.6 Callsign Menu

10.5.8.6.1 Forced Act

Objective:
The Forced Act order is used to force the activation/presentation of the data relevant to a flight plan
(electronic strips, lists, tables) in the next downstream sector.

Activation:
1. Select the flight, recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on the CALLSIGN MENU and
select FORCED ACT.

Result:
1. The SFPL is forced in AIS status on the next sector, the ACT message is triggered.

10.5.8.6.2 Change Of Frequency – COF

Objective:
The Change of Frequency order allows the EXE controller, who is the actual responsible of the
flight, to notify to the next controller (who will do the AOC order) that the Flight has been instructed
to contact that sector in Frequency.

Activation:
1. Select the flight and recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on the CALLSIGN MENU
and select COF.

Result:
1. After the issuing of the COF Order:
a. in the transferring FIR:the track label and the “call sign” field of the electronic strip and
lists related to the flight, change color and the acronym “COF” is displayed in line 0 of the
relevant track label
b. in the receiving FIR: all the fields of the track label, the “call sign” in the electronic strip
and lists related to the flight will change color and acronym “COF” is displayed in line 0 of
the relevant track label.

After the handover in the receiving CWP, the label, the strip and lists assume the assumed color.
In case of error, the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 187 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Note:
The acronym “COF”in line 0 will be displayed till the reporting of boundary of the transferring sector

10.5.8.6.3 Request Of Frequency – ROF

Objective:
The Request of Frequency order allows the EXE controller of the downstream Sector (who will do
the AOC order), when the Flight is already in AIS state to ask to the controlling operator for the
Flight in Frequency.

Activation:
1. Select the flight, recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on the CALLSIGN MENU and
select ROF.

Result:
1. After the issuing of the ROF Order:
a. in the transferring FIR: the acronym “ROF” will be displayed in Line “0” of the label in
receiving co-ordination color, the call-sign will be displayed in receiving co-ordination
color.
b. in the receiving FIR: the acronym “ROF” will be displayed in Line “0” of the label in
transferring co-ordination color
Note:
The acronym “ROF”in line 0 will be displayed until the starting of the transferring of control.

10.5.8.6.4 Next Unit

Objective:
The Next Unit order allows the EXE controller who is the actual responsible of the flight to leave the
flight to the next unit.

Activation:
1. Select the flight, recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on the CALLSIGN MENU and
select NEXT UNIT.

Result:
1. The track label change in ‘notify’ status if the next unit is executed befor the report of the last
COP. After the report of the last COP, the track label changes in ‘nearby’ status.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 188 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.8.6.5 From Next Unit

Objective:
From the next Unit order allows the EXE controller who was the last responsible of the flight to take
back the control of the flight from the next unit.

Activation:
1. Select the flight on which a Next Unit order has been executed, recall the FLIGHT DATA
MENU and click LB on the CALLSIGN MENU and select FROM NEXT UNIT.

Result:
1. The track reverts in Controlled status.

10.5.8.7 FPL Extended Data–FLD

Objective:
The FPL Extended Data order allows the controller to display the FPL Extended Data of the actually
selected flight.

Activation:
1. Select the flight from any lists, recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on FPL
EXTENDED DATA button.
Or
Click MB on ADES field of the e-strip

Result:
1. The FLDA Extended Data is displayed on the screen.

Note:
A maximum of 3 (system parameter) FLDA can be opened at the same time: in case of re-entering
of the FLD order, the related diagnostic is displayed in the Diagnostic List.

10.5.8.8 FPL Message–FPM

Objective:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 189 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The FPL Message order allows the EXE/PLN controller to display the FPLM page of the currently
selected flight.

Activation:
1. Recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on FPL MESSAGE button

Result:
1. the FPLM page is displayed on the screen.

10.5.8.9 Text – TXT

Objective:
The Free Text order allows to insert or modify the free text associated to a flight plan.

Activation:
1. Select a flight, recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on TEXT button;

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 135 - Free Text preview window

Parameters:
TEXT free text (16 char)

After the input to the system,


The inserted text will be associated to the selected flight and will be shown on the related Electronic
Strip and/or Macro track label (if configured) and the “ORDER EXECUTED” message is displayed in
the Diagnostic List.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 190 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Note:
no checks are performed on the text to be inserted

10.5.8.10 SSR Code Assignment –SSR

Objective:
The SRR code assignment order allows to insert an SSR code for a flight.

Activation:
1. Select a flight, recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on SSR  SSR CODE.
ASSIGNMENT button

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 136 - SSR Code Assignment preview window

Parameters:
PMODE Previous Radar Interrogation
Mode
PCODE Previous SSR code
AMODE Actual Radar Interrogation Mode
ACODE Actual SSR code
NMODE Next Radar Interrogation Mode
NCODE Next SSR code

After the input to the system:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 191 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

if input’s check result OK


then the inserted SSR code is assigned to the selected flight and the diagnostic “ORDER
EXECUTED” is displayed in the Diagnostic List
else the order is rejected and a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area

10.5.8.11 SSR Code Release - SRL

Objective:
The SSR code Release order allows the controller to release an SSR code assigned to a flight.

Activation:
1. Select the flight and recall FLIGHT DATA MEN, click LB on the SSR  SSR CODE
RELEASE button.

Figure 137 - SSR Code submenu

Result:
1. The SSR code assigned to the flight is released and related diagnostic is displayed in the
Diagnostic List.

10.5.8.12 Flight Equipment

10.5.8.12.1 MODE S Equipment

Objective:
The MODE S equipment order allows the controller to set MODE S equipment.

Activation:
1. Select the flight and recall FLIGHT DATA MENU, click LB on the FLIGHT
EQUIPMENTMODE S EQUIP button.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 192 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 138 - MODE S EQUIP submenu

Result:
1. The MODE S equipment is set.

10.5.8.12.2 8 33 Equipment

Objective:
The 8 33 order allows the controller to 8 33 equipment.

Activation:
1. Select the flight and recall FLIGHT DATA MENU, click LB on the FLIGHT EQUIPMENT8
33 button.

Figure 139 - 8 33 submenu

Result:
1. The 8 33equipment is set.

10.5.8.12.3 REDUCED VERTICAL SEPARATION MINIMUM - RVSM

Objective:
the RVSM order allows the controller to set RVSM equip

Activation:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 193 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1. Select the flight and recall FLIGHT DATA MENU, click LB on the FLIGHT
EQUIPMENTRVSM button.

Figure 140 - RVSM submenu

Result:
1. The RVSM equipment is set.

10.5.8.12.4 BRNAV

Objective:
The BRNAV order allows the controller to set presence of PRNAV or BRNAV equipment

Activation:
1. Select the flight and recall FLIGHT DATA MENU, click LB on the FLIGHT
EQUIPMENTBRNAV button.

Figure 141 - BRNAV submenu

Result:
1. Equipment PRNAV/BRNAV is set.

10.5.8.13 Amendment ICAO Equipment

Objective:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 194 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The Amendment ICAO preview window allows the controller to update additional flight plan
information regarding the new amendment ICAO of the flight.

Activation:
1. Select the flight and recall FLIGHT DATA MENU, click LB on the FLIGHT
EQUIPMENTFULL EQP button.
2. Modify information of field 10 A, 10 B, 18.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 142 - Amendment ICAO preview window

2. Additional flight plan information regarding the new amendment ICAO are updated.

Parameters:
A RCN Radio, Communication,
EQP Navigation
B SSR SSR code assignment
EQP
PBN Performance-based Navigation
COM Communication
NAV Navigation
DAT Digital Audio Tape
STS Special handling

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 195 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.8.14 Display Predicted Trajectory – DPT

Objective:
The Trajectory order displays the trajectory of the selected flight on the GRP.

Activation:
1. Click RB on the EXIT FIX area of a controlled track.
Or
Click LB on FLIGHT DATA MENU, on TRAJECTORY and then on HORIZONTAL order.

Result:
1. the trajectory is displayed on the GRP starting from the current position of the track, if it’s
present, or from the last reported point if the track is absent.

Figure 143 - Predicted Trajectory (example

A fix in the trajectory is represented by a circle. Near this circle is displayed a label with information
about the flight. This label has two formats:

Normal mode: Line 0 Estimated time over the


point
Line1 Estimated level over the
point

Extended mode: Line 0 Estimated time over the Point name


point
Line1 Estimated level over the CALLSIGN
point

The extended mode is available when the mouse cursor is over the label.

Sensible field of the predicted trajectory fix label:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 196 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

ADDRESSABLE LB Button MB Button RB Button


FIELD
CALLSIGN Remove displayed trajectory

De-Activation:
Click RB on the EXIT FIX area of the controlled track.
Or
Click LB on FLIGHT DATA MENU, on TRAJECTORY and then on HORIZONTAL order.
Or
Click MB on every fields of the extended mode labels of the trajectory

Note:
The displayed trajectory is removed if the flight is deleted.

10.5.8.15 Vertical Aid Window - VAW

Objective:
The Vertical Aid Window (VAW), provides a predicted vertical profile for a selected flight through a
defined sector. Displayed on it are also conflicts MTCD.

Activation:
1. Click RB on the EXIT FIX area of a controlled track.
Or
Click LB on FLIGHT DATA MENU, on TRAJECTORY and then on VERTICAL order.

Result:
1. The vertical trajectory is displayed.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 197 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 144 - VAW window

The Vaw contains:


 the selected flight vertical trajectory profile;
 the context band occupation;
 the CFL/PEL and XFL vertical axis and their values;
 the distance interval horizontal axe and their values;
 the track button to hide the track label;
 the area of interest.

De-Activation:
Click RB on the EXIT FIX area of the controlled track.
Or
Click LB on FLIGHT DATA MENU, on TRAJECTORY and then on VERTICAL order.

Note:
Scrolling up the vertical scroll bar, the operator can enlarge the scale altitude. Conversely, the scale
narrows.
Shift left the horizontal scroll bar, you can enlarge time scale. Conversely, the scale narrows.
There are two horizontal scroll bars, because one of them you change scale and with another you
scroll on it. Same operation also applies to horizontal scroll bar.
Obviously, the trajectory is extended or close following scroll bars movements.
In the upper-right, there is the G button to add or not grid to the VAW window.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 198 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

In the upper-left, there is the T button to see entire trajectory on the VAW.
Lower right there is a C button to centre the VAW on its flight.

10.5.8.16 Fast Flight Plan – FFP

Objective:
The Fast Flight Plan Insert order allows the PLN controller to enters a new flight plan as “pending” or
“active”, depending on the CLR field filling.

Activation:
1. Recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on FFP button
Or
press F2 on the keyboard
Or
click MB on either one of TRACK, MAP, LIST, RADAR, CONF, PLAN, EXE, FLIGHT or SUP
buttons of the LDA

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 199 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 145 - Fast Flight Plan preview window

Parameters:
CALLSIGN Flight identification
IN_FIX Inbound fix
ETO/D Estimated time overfly/ of departure
PFL Planned flight level
PEL Planned Entry Level
CFL Cleared flight level
PMODE Radar Interrogation mode
PCODE SSR code
TYPE Aircraft type
ADEP Departure Aerodrome
ADES Destination aerodrome
TAS True air speed

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 200 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

CTOT Calculated take off time


ROUTE Route
RWY Runway
SID Standard Instrumental Departure
RVSM Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum status
PRNAV Precision or Basic Regional Navigation
8 33 UHF equipment
FR Flight rule
CLR If it is filled with an ‘X’ the flight will be cleared and become immediately active.
If the field is empty the flight is inserted in pending status.
MDS Mode S equipment
FIELD 18 STS Field extracted from Field 18

After the input to the system:

if the input check result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDP;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List (order sent to
FDP/order executed).
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Note:
The following checks are performed on the new flight plan:
 the new flight plan is initially submitted to the validity check, consisting of format analysis (with
the exception of the flight route) in accordance with the ICAO PANS/ATM 4444;
 the planned flight level and the true air speed must be equal to or lower than the maximum
values foreseen for the aircraft type;
 if the flight plan is a VFR the estimated elapsed time must be equal to or lower than 24 hours;
 the relation (actual time - lower delta time  off-block time  actual time + upper delta time)
must be satisfied by input parameters, where upper and lower delta time are system
parameters.

The following SSR Codes are not accepted:


A7500
A7600
A7700

The Route of a new flight inserted must be filled.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 201 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

When the FDPS is off the new flight plan inserted with the FFP order is automatically considered as
reduced and in the pending state.

10.5.8.17 FPL ICAO Insert

Objective:
The FPL ICAO Insert order allows the controller to insert a code ICAO for a flight.

Activation:
1. Select a flight, click on the FLIGHT DATA MENU and select FPL ICAO INSERT.

Figure 146 - FPL ICAO Insert

Result:
1. The ICAO code is inserted to the flight.

10.5.8.18 Inactive Flight: Browse –BRW

Objective:
The Browse order displays the list of the passive flight plans.

Activation:
1. Recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU, click LB on INACTIVE FLIGHT  BROWSE button;

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 202 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 147 - Browse Passive Flight List order preview window

Parameters:
CALLSIGN Identification of the flight
ADEP Departure Aerodrome
ADES Destination Aerodrome
ETF/EOBT Minimum off block time
MIN Minimum off block date
ETF/EOBT Maximum off block time
MAX Maximum off block date
IFIR Outbound FIR
OFIR Inbound FIR
FT Flight type

After the input to the system:

if the input check result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDP;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List (order sent to
FDP/order executed).
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

The inactive flight are filtered by the value inserted in the various field of the BRW input mask and
inserted in the browse list.

Note:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 203 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

If the callsign filed is partially specified all passive flights having the first part of the callsign matching
with that specified are displayed. The same rule is applied to the departure Aerodrome and arrival
Aerodrome fields.
Passive flight plans are extracted from the FDP database.
To request the display of the complete list of passive flight plans all fields shall be left empty.

10.5.8.19 FPL Passive Cancel –CNL

Objective:
The FPL Passive Cancel order allows to cancel the selected inactive flight plan.

Activation:
1. Select a flight,recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU, click LB on INACTIVE FLIGHT  FPL
PASSIVE CANCEL button;

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 148 - Passive Flight Plan Cancel preview window

Parameters:
CALLSIGN Identification of the flight
ADEP Departure Aerodrome
ADES Destination Aerodrome
OBT Off Block Time

After the input to the system:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 204 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

if the input check result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDP;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List (order sent to
FDP/order executed).
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

The Browse list is automatically modified inserting the letter ‘C’ near the cancelled inactive flight.
When the Browse list will be update the cancelled inactive flight will not be displayed.

10.5.8.20 Inactive Flight Amend –IFA

Objective:
The FPL Passive Amend order allows to amend the selected inactive flight plan.

Activation:
1. Select a flight,recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU, click LB on INACTIVE FLIGHT  FPL
PASSIVE AMEND button;

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 149 - Inactive Flight Amend preview window

Parameters:
CALLSIGN Flight identification
DEP Departure Aerodrome

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 205 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

DES Destination Aerodrome


EOBT Estimated off block time
TYPE Aircraft type
TAS True air speed
PFL Planned flight level
EET Estimated elapsed time
FR Flight rules
ETF Estimated time on FIR
ROUTE Route

After the input to the system:

if the input check result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDPS;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List (order sent to
FDPS/order executed) and in the Browse list in the first flight data column the ‘U’ letter
appear
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

10.5.8.21 Registration Number– REG

Objective:
The Registration Number order is used to record the registration number of a selected flight.

Activation:
1. Select a flight,recall the FLIGHT DATA and click LB on REG. NUMBER button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 206 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 150 - Registration number preview

Parameters:
REGISTRATION registration number

After the input to the system:

if the input checks’ result is OK;


then the order is sent to FDPS;
the related diagnostic message is displayed in the Diagnostic List.
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

10.5.8.22 Identification Flight Plan – IFP

Objective:
The Identification Flight Plan order allows the EXE controller to enter a reduced active flight plan and
correlate it to a pending radar track.

Activation:
1. Select pending track,recall the FLIGHT DATA MENU and click LB on IDENTIFY button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 207 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 151 - Identification Flight Plan preview window

Parameters:
CALLSIGN Flight identification
ADEP Departure aerodrome
ADES Destination aerodrome
TYPE Aircraft type
FR Flight rule (IS/VS)
8 33 UHF equipment
RVSM Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum status

After the input to the system:

if a flight with the same callsign does not exist;


then the CWP accepts the order, enters the reduced flight plan (and notifies it to FDPS), and
the callsign is displayed in the track label: i.e. the correlated track becomes “controlled”
(no AOC is required). The message “IFP `callsign` ORDER EXECUTED” appears in the
Diagnostic List”, the flight information will be displayed in the SEL list (Special Entry
List).
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

If the track selected is a MODE S track the field CALLSIGN is filled automatically with the received
callsign from the mode S data.

10.5.8.23 Fast Identify Flight– IDD

Objective:
The Identification Fast Identify Flight order allows the EXE controller to enter a reduced active flight
plan and assign an SSR code to it.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 208 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Activation:
1. Hook the desired uncorrelated track, click LB on FLIGHT button on LDA and click LB on
FAST IDENTIFY button.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 152 - Fast Identify preview window

Parameters:
CALLSIGN flight identification
MODE SSR mode
CODE SSR code

After the activation of the order, the controller inserts the Callsign and click the Enter button (if a
flight is selected, the Callsign field will be already full):

First Enter : the system checks that any other flight has the same Callsign;
Second Enter: the system assigns the SSR code and inserts the flight, if it is not already present, in
the SEL of the sector that executes that order.
If the flight is already in the SEL with a SSR code already assigned, the system shows in the SSR
field the code, with the possibility to check.

Note:
The inserted callsign and the SSR code of the hooked uncorrelated track are automatically linked by
the system. The track became controlled without performing an AoC order.

10.5.8.24 Paper Strip

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 209 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Objective:
The Paper Strip order allows the controller to print out of the paper strip of the selected flight.

Activation:
1. Hook the SFPL and click LB on FLIGHT button on LDA and click LB on PAPER STRIP
button.

Result:
1. The paper strip of the selected SFPL is printed.

10.5.8.25 Empty Strip

Objective:
The Empty Strip order allows the controller to have an empty electronic strip.

Activation:
1. click LB on FLIGHT button on LDA and click LB on EMPTY STRIP button.

Result:
1. The empty paper strip is printed out.

10.5.9 Cpdlc Menu

.CPDLC

CPDLC Conn./
CPDLC End Service.
MIKE

CPDLC ORDERS LEVEL MAINTAIN [altitude]


CLIMB TO AND MAINTAIN
[altitude]
DESCEND TO AND
MAINTAIN [altitude]
MORE CLIMB TO REACH [altitude] BY
[time]

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 210 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

CLIMB TO REACH [altitude] BY


[position]
DESCEND TO REACH
[altitude] BY [time]
DESCEND TO REACH
[altitude] BY [position]
EXPEDITE CLIMB TO [altitude]
EXPEDITE DESCEND TO
[altitude]
IMMEDIATELY CLIMB TO
[altitude]
IMMEDIATELY DESCEND TO
[altitude]
ROUTE / WHEN ABLE PROCEED
OFFSET DIRECT TO [pos]
PROCEED DIRECT TO [pos]
CLEARED TO DEVIATE UP
TO [pos]
LATERAL OFFSET OFFSET
[distanceoffset][direction] OF
ROUTE
AT [position]OFFSET
[distanceoffset] [direction] OF
ROUTE
PROCEED BACK ON ROUTE

CROSSING / CROSS [pos] AT [time]


SPEED
CROSS [pos] AT OR
BEFORE [time]
CROSS [pos] AT OR AFTER
[time]
SPEED MAINTAIN [spd]
MAINTAIN PRESENT [spd]
MAINTAIN [spd] OR GREATER
MAINTAIN [spd] OR LESS
CONTACT / SYS CONTACT [unit] [freq]
MNG
SQUANK IDENT

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 211 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

NEGOTIATION WHEN CAN YOU ACCEPT


REQUEST [altitude]
CAN YOU ACCEPT [altitude]
AT [time]
OTHERS REPORT BACK ON ROUTE
REPORT ALTITUDE [altitude]

REPORT PASSING [pos]

CONFIRM POSITION
CONFIRM ALTITUDE

REQUEST POSITION
REPORT
REPORT DISTANCE [tofrom]
[position]
ADDITIONAL MESSAGES DUE TO TRAFFIC

[free text]

[free text urgent]

[free text]
THEN
MIKE

AFN CONTACT
NEXT DATA
AUTHORITY

HISTORY BY
CALLSIGN
SECTOR
INFORMATION LIST

Table 23 - CPDLC Menu Layout

10.5.9.1 Manual CPDLC Connection

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC connection request to the selected
disconnected Flight.

Activation:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 212 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1. Hook a CPDLC disconnected flight


2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on Connect to. CPDLC

Result: If the flight is disconnected, the following window is displayed:

Figure 153 - CPDLC connection

Parameters: none.

De-Activation: none.

10.5.9.2 Manual CPDLC Disconnection

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC disconnection request to the selected
connected Flight
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on. CPDLC End Service

Result: If the flight is connected, the following window is displayed:

Figure 154 - CPDLC disconnection

Parameters: none.

De-Activation: none.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 213 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.9.3 MIKE

Objective: To allow the Operator to send the STK Microphone Check message to all datalink
equipped aircraft.

Activation:
1. Hook a ADS flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on. MIKE

Result: If the flight is connected, the following window is displayed:

Figure 155 - MIKE

Parameters: Frequency.

De-Activation: none.

10.5.9.4 CPDLC ORDERS

Objective: To allow the Operator to Exchange CPDLC messages with a selected Flight.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button

Result: If the flight is connected, the following window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 214 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 156 - CPDLC ORDERS

Parameters: It depends on the CPDLC Order selected.

De-Activation: none.

Note: Only the Owner of the Flight can exchange messages with the flight. The CDPLC Orders
menu is also available by clicking with AB

10.5.9.4.1 CPDLC ORDER - LEVEL MAINTAIN [ALTITUDE]’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message MAINTAIN [altitude].


Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on LEVEL and then MAINTAIN [altitude].

Figure 157 - CPDLC Orders Level

Result: If the flight is connected, the following window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 215 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 158 - CPDLC ORDERS/LEVEL/MAINTAIN

Parameters: Flight Level.

4. Click on Send.
5. If Click on ADD it's possible to add the current message in a list of maximum five items.

Note: The connection is open in uplink. The DL Flight shows this information.

Figure 159 - DL Flight List

Note: The connection is open in uplink. The up arrow is also shown in the flight graphical
representation.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 216 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.9.4.2 CPDLC ORDER - LEVEL CLIMB TO AND MAINTAIN [altitude]

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that a climb to a specified level is to
commence and once reached the specified level is to be maintained.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on LEVEL and then CLIMB TO AND MAINTAIN [altitude].

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.3 CPDLC ORDER - LEVEL DESCEND TO AND MAINTAIN [altitude]

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that a descent to a specified level is
to commence and once reached the specified level is to be maintained.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on LEVEL and then DESCEND TO AND MAINTAIN [altitude].

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed

10.5.9.4.4 CPDLC ORDER - LEVEL CLIMB TO REACH [altitude] BY [time]

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that a climb is to commence at a rate
such that the specified level is reached at or before the specified time.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on LEVEL and then MORE
4. click LB on CLIMB TO REACH [altitude] BY [time].

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed

10.5.9.4.5 CPDLC ORDER - LEVEL CLIMB TO REACH [altitude] BY [position]

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message Instruction that a climb is to
commence at a rate such that the specified level is reached at or before the specified position
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 217 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

3. click LB on LEVEL and then MORE


4. click LB on CLIMB TO REACH [altitude] BY [position]

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.6 CPDLC ORDER - LEVEL DESCEND TO REACH [altitude] BY [time]

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message Instruction that a descent is to
commence at a rate such that the specified level is reached at or before the specified time.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on LEVEL and then MORE
4. click LB on DESCEND TO REACH [altitude] BY [time]

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.7 CPDLC ORDER - LEVEL DESCEND TO REACH [altitude] BY [position]

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that a descent is to commence at a
rate such that the specified level is reached at or before the specified position.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on LEVEL and then MORE
4. click LB on DESCEND TO REACH [altitude] BY [position].

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.8 CPDLC ORDER - LEVEL EXPEDITE CLIMB TO [altitude]

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that the climb to the specified level
should be made at the aircraft’s best rate.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on LEVEL and then MORE
4. click LB on EXPEDITE CLIMB TO [altitude].

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 218 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.9.4.9 CPDLC ORDER - LEVEL EXPEDITE DESCEND TO [altitude]

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that the descent to the specified
level should be made at the aircraft’s best rate.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on LEVEL and then MORE
4. click LB on EXPEDITE DESCEND TO [altitude].

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.10 CPDLC ORDER - LEVEL IMMEDIATELY CLIMB TO [altitude]

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message to immediately climb to the specified
level.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on LEVEL and then MORE
4. click LB on IMMEDIATELY CLIMB TO [altitude].

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.11 CPDLC ORDER - LEVEL IMMEDIATELY DESCEND TO [altitude]

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message to immediately climb to the specified
level.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on LEVEL and then MORE
4. click LB on IMMEDIATELY DESCEND TO [altitude].

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.12 CPDLC ORDER ‘WHEN ABLE PROCEED DIRECT TO [POSITION]’

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 219 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message WHEN ABLE PROCEED DIRECT
TO [position].
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on ROUTE/OFFSET and WHEN ABLE PROCEED DIRECT TO [position].

Figure 160 - CPDLC Orders Route / Offset

Result: If the flight is connected, the following window is displayed:

Figure 161 - WHEN ABLE PROCEED DIRECT TO [position]

Parameters: FIX

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 220 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.9.4.13 CPDLC ORDER ‘PROCEED DIRECT TO [pos]’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message to proceed directly from its present
position to the specified position.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on ROUTE/OFFSET and PROCEED DIRECT TO [position].

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.14 CPDLC ORDER ‘CLEARED TO DEVIATE UP TO [pos]’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message to to deviate up to the specified
position.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on ROUTE/OFFSET and CLEARED TO DEVIATE UP TO [pos].

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.15 CPDLC ORDER LATERAL ‘OFFSET [distanceoffset][direction] OF ROUTE’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that a parallel track, offset from the
cleared track by the specified distance in the specified direction, be approved.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on ROUTE/OFFSET LATERAL OFFESET
4. click LB on OFFSET [distanceoffset][direction] OF ROUTE

Result: I If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.16 CPDLC ORDER LATERAL OFFSET ' AT [position]OFFSET [distanceoffset]


[direction] OF ROUTE’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that a parallel track, offset from the
cleared track by the specified distance in the specified direction, be approved from the specified
position .
Activation:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 221 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight


2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on ROUTE/OFFSET LATERAL OFFESET
4. click LB on AT [position]OFFSET [distanceoffset] [direction] OF ROUTE

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.17 CPDLC ORDER LATERAL OFFSET 'PROCEED BACK ON ROUTE’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that the cleared flight route is to be
rejoined.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on ROUTE/OFFSET LATERAL OFFESET
4. click LB on PROCEED BACK ON ROUTE

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.18 CPDLC ORDER CROSS [position] AT [TIME]’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that the specified position is to be
crossed at the specified time.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on CROSSING/SPEED and CROSS [position] AT [TIME].

Figure 162 - CPDLC Orders Crossing / Speed

Result: If the flight is connected, the following window is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 222 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 163 - CROSS [position] at [time]


Parameters: FIX and crossing time.

10.5.9.4.19 CPDLC ORDER CROSS [pos] AT OR BEFORE [time]’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that the specified position is to be
crossed at or after the specified time..
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on CROSSING/SPEED and CROSS [pos] AT OR BEFORE [time].

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.20 CPDLC ORDER CROSS [pos] AT OR AFTER [time]’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that the specified position is to be
crossed at or after the specified time..
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on CROSSING/SPEED and CROSS [pos] AT OR AFTER [time].

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.21 CPDLC ORDER SPEED MANTAIN[speed]’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC that the specified speed is to be maintained.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 223 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button


3. click LB on CROSSING/SPEED and SPEED
4. click LB on MANTAIN[speed].

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.22 CPDLC ORDER SPEED MAINTAIN PRESENT [spd]’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send that the present speed is to be maintained
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on CROSSING/SPEED and SPEED
4. click LB on MAINTAIN PRESENT [spd]

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.23 CPDLC ORDER SPEED MAINTAIN [spd] OR GREATER

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send that the specified speed or a greater speed is to be
maintained.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on CROSSING/SPEED and SPEED
4. click LB on MAINTAIN [spd] OR GREATER]

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.24 CPDLC ORDER SPEED MAINTAIN [spd] OR LESS

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC that the specified speed or a lesser speed is to
be maintained
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on CROSSING/SPEED and SPEED
4. click LB on MAINTAIN [spd] OR LESS]

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.25 CPDLC ORDER ‘CONTACT [UNIT NAME] [FREQUENCY]’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that the ATS unit with the specified
ATS unit name is to be contacted on the specified frequency.
Activation:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 224 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight


2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on CONTACT/SYS MNG and CONTACT [unit name] [frequency].

Figure 164 - CPDLC Orders Contact / Sys Mng

Result: If the flight is connected, the following window is displayed:

Figure 165 - CONTACT [unit name] [frequency]

Parameters: Facility id and type, band and frequency.

10.5.9.4.26 CPDLC ORDER ‘SQUANK IDENT’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message that the “ident” function on the SSR
transponder is to be actuated.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 225 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button


3. click LB on CONTACT/SYS MNG and SQUANK IDENT.

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.27 CPDLC ORDER NEGOTIATION REQUEST ‘WHEN CAN YOU ACCEPT [altitude]’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message for the earliest time or position at
which the specified level can be accepted
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on NEGOTIATION REQUEST and WHEN CAN YOU ACCEPT [altitude]

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.28 CPDLC ORDER NEGOTIATION REQUEST ‘CAN YOU ACCEPT [altitude] AT [time]’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message to report whether or not the specified
level can be accepted at the specified time.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on NEGOTIATION REQUEST and CAN YOU ACCEPT [altitude] AT [time]

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.29 CPDLC ORDER OTHERS ‘REPORT BACK ON ROUTE’

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message to report when the aircraft is back on
the cleared route.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on OTHERS and REPORT BACK ON ROUTE

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.30 CPDLC ORDER OTHERS ‘REPORT ALTITUDE [altitude]


Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message to report when the aircraft is in level
flight at the specified level.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 226 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button


3. click LB on OTHERS and REPORT ALTITUDE [altitude]

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.31 CPDLC ORDER OTHERS ‘REPORT PASSING [pos]'


Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message to report when the aircraft has
passed the specified position
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on OTHERS and REPORT PASSING [pos]

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.32 CPDLC ORDER OTHERS ‘CONFIRM POSITION'


Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message to report the present position.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on OTHERS and CONFIRM POSITION

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.33 CPDLC ORDER OTHERS ‘CONFIRM ALTITUDE


Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message to report the present level..
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on OTHERS and CONFIRM ALTITUDE

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.34 CPDLC ORDER OTHERS ‘REQUEST POSITION REPORT


Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message to make a position report.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on OTHERS and REQUEST POSITION REPORT

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 227 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.9.4.35 CPDLC ORDER OTHERS ‘REPORT DISTANCE [tofrom] [position]'


Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message to report the present distance to or
from the specified position.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on OTHERS and REPORT DISTANCE [tofrom] [position]

Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.36 CPDLC ORDER ADDITIONAL MESSAGES ‘[free text]'


Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message with free text.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on OTHERS and then ADDITIONAL MESSAGES
4. click LB on [free text]
Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.37 CPDLC ORDER ADDITIONAL MESSAGES ‘[free text urgent]'


Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message with free text with priority urgent.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on OTHERS and then ADDITIONAL MESSAGES
4. click LB on [free text urgent]
Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.4.38 CPDLC ORDER ADDITIONAL MESSAGES ‘THEN'


Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message used to link two messages,
indicating the proper order of execution of clearances/ instructions
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on OTHERS and then ADDITIONAL MESSAGES
4. click LB on THEN'
Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed. .

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 228 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.9.4.39 CPDLC ORDER ADDITIONAL MESSAGES ‘DUE TO TRAFFIC'


Objective: To allow the Operator to Send CPDLC message with issue due to traffic
considerations.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on CPDLC ORDERS button
3. click LB on OTHERS and then ADDITIONAL MESSAGES
4. click LB on DUE TO TRAFFIC
Result: If the flight is connected, the relevant window is displayed.

10.5.9.5 NEXT DATA AUTHORITY (NDA)

Objective: To allow the Operator to Send NDA message to the avionics that the specified data
authority is the next data authority. If no data authority is specified, this indicates that any previously
specified next data authority is no longer valid.
Activation:
1. Hook a CPDLC connected flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on NEXT DATA AUTHORITY button

Result: the following window is displayed:

Figure 166 - NDA

Parameters: Facility id.


1. Click on Enter to send Facility id of Next Authority.

De-Activation: none.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 229 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.9.6 HISTORY BY CALLSIGN

Objective: To allow the Operator to require the CPDLC messages exchanged for a selected
Flight.
Activation:
1. Hook an ADS flight
2. click LB on CPDLC button on LDA and click LB on HISTORY BY CALLSIGN button

Figure 167 - History Message

Result: the following window is displayed:

Figure 168 - History Window

Parameters: none

De-Activation: none.

10.5.10 Supervisor Menu


SUP
SECTOR CONFIG

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 230 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

FUNCTION ASSIGMENT
MONITORING
SEND SPV MSG
LOAD MAPS
SET PRIVILEGE
RELEASE PRIVILEGE
MODIFY PASSWORD
SPV MAP SEND SECTOR
BROADCAST
CANCEL SECTOR
BROADCAST
RWY IN USE
LOGIN DATA
SNET REGION HANDLING STCA REGION DESCRIPTOR
STCA TRACK FILTERING STCA PRE SELECTION
FILTERING
STCA ELECTION AND
FILTERING
GLOBAL FILTER6 STCA
MSAW
APW
APAM
MTCD
CLAM
RAM
7
AURAL ALERTS FILTER STCA
MSAW
APW
APAM

6
Upon enable of the filter, the name of the relevant alarm is displayed in red color on FILTER row of the SDMA
and the relevant row in the cascade menu is displayed in red colour.
7
Upon enable of the filter, the name of the relevant alarm is displayed in red color on AURAL row of the
SDMAand the relevant row in the cascade menu is displayed in red colour.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 231 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

CLAM
RAM
MTCD
Table 24 - Supervisor Menu Layout

10.5.10.1 Sector Reconfiguration – RIC

Objective:
The sector Reconfiguration order allows the controller with the “supervisor” privilege enabled to
combine/split sectors.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the SECTOR CONFIG button of the SUPERVISOR MENU.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 169 - Sector Configuration preview window

Parameters:
ENV processing environment
SUITE logical suite
SECTOR pre-assigned or absorbed
sector

After the input to the system:

if the input check result is OK;

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 232 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

then the console receives an “hot restart”.


Else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Note:
the order requires the specification of the processing environment to unambiguously identify the
logical suite within the ODS.

10.5.10.2 Logical ATS Function Assignment – LFA

Objective:
The Logical ATS Function Assignment order allows the controller with the “supervisor” privilege to
change the ATS function of a logical console.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the FUNCTION ASSIGNMENT button of the SUPERVISOR MENU.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 170 - Logical ATS Function Assignment preview window

Parameters:
ENV Processing environment
AFUN Air ATS function
GFUN Ground ATS function
LCI Logical CWP

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 233 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

SUITE Suite name

After the input to the system:

if the input checks’ result is OK;


then if the ATS function is essential for the complete suite operatively, the receiving logical
CWP shall be operational and assigned to a physical CWP.
Else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Notes:
The order redefines the orders effectively enabled on the MMA.

The possible ATS Air functions available are:


 EXE: Executive
 PLN: Planner
 EXP: Executive + Planner
 WTC: Watcher
The possible ATS Ground functions available are:
 CDA: Clearence Delivery
 GND: Ground
 WTC: Watcher
With AFUN = EXP and GFUN = GND the tower function is achieved.
The following checks are performed:
The ATS function shall be compatible with the display type of the physical CWP to which the
receiving logical CWP is associated;
the ATS function shall be compatible with the one(s) actually assigned to the receiving logical CWP;
the WTC function is automatically assigned to the releasing logical CWP when this remains with no
ATS function(s) assigned. The WTC function can be manually assigned only if at least in a sector is
present the EXP function.

10.5.10.3 Logical CWP Monitoring – LCM

Objective:
The Logical CWP Monitoring order allows the controller with the “supervisor” privilege the monitoring
of a selected CWP.

Activation:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 234 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1. Click LB on the MONITORING button of the SUPERVISOR MENU.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 171 - Logical CWP Monitoring preview window

Parameters:
ENV Processing environment
PCI Physical CWP
LCI Logical CWP
SUITE Logical suite

After the input to the system:

if the input checks’ result is OK;


then the specified logical CWP, already assigned as “normal” (working status) on a physical
CWP, will be reproduced with the “monitor” working status and assigned to the specified
physical CWP.
Else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Note:
The following rules are applied:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 235 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

 the display type of the specified physical CWP shall be compatible with one of the
physical CWP to which the logical CWP to be monitored is assigned;
 Since the ATS functions of the specified CWP will be lost following the order, this is
rejected if the operational suite configuration that should result will be below the minimum
allowed;
 the logical CWP to be monitored shall be operative and already assigned to a physical
CWP.

10.5.10.4 SVR – Supervisor message

Objective:
The Supervisor message order allows the controller with the “supervisor” privilege enabled to allow
editing and transmission of a supervisor message to all CWPs.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the SEND SPV. MSG button of the SUPERVISOR MENU.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 172 - Send Supervisor Message preview window

Parameters:
MESSAGE supervisor message

After the input to the system:

if the input’s check is OK;


then the CWP presents messages received from the supervisor controller in the Warning
Alarm List window.
Else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 236 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.10.5 Supervisor Privilege Setting – SPS

Objective:
The Supervisor Privilege Setting order allows the controller with the “supervisor” privilege enabled to
establish the ATC Supervisor.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the SET PRIVILEGE button of the SUPERVISOR MENU.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 173 - Set Privilege preview window


Parameters:

PASSWORD Password

After the input to the system:


if the input’s check is OK;
then the ATC supervisor is established.
else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area.

10.5.10.6 Supervisor Privilege Releasing – SPR

Objective:
The Supervisor Privilege Releasing order allows the controller with the “supervisor” privilege
enabled to disable the ATC Supervisor.

Activation:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 237 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

1. Click LB on the RELEASE PRIVILEGE button of the SUPERVISOR MENU.

Result:
1. The ATC Supervisor is disabled on the CWP.

10.5.10.7 Supervisor Password Modify – SPM

Objective:
The Supervisor Password Modify order allows the controller with the “supervisor” privilege enabled
to change the password to get the supervisor privilege.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the MODIFY PASSWORD button of the SUPERVISOR MENU.

Result:
1. The following preview window is displayed:

Figure 174 - Modify Password preview window

Parameters:
OLD PASSWORD Old password
NEW PASSWORD New password
CONFIRM NEW New password
PASSWORD

After the input to the system


if the input’s check is OK;

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 238 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

then the new password is set.


else a message is displayed in the Warning Sub Area

Note:
A default password is provided (system parameter), that is assumed after the initial ATC system
start-up.

10.5.10.8 Supervisor Map Sending – SMS

Objective:
The Supervisor Map Sending order allows the controller with the “supervisor” privilege enabled to
send the actually displayed local map to the others CWP as supervisor map.

Activation:
1. Click LB on the SEND SPV MAP - SECTOR button of the SUPERVISOR MENU.
2. Click LB on the SEND SPV MAP - BROADCAST button of the SUPERVISOR MENU.

Result:
1. The following preview mask is displayed:

Figure 175 - Supervisor Map Sending preview window

Clicking on this button is opened also another imagine with the list of all sector selected with
a scroll bar.

2. The following preview mask is displayed:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 239 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 176 - Supervisor Broadcast Map preview window

Parameters:
SECTOR NAME Sector name
ID MAP IP
BROADCAST MAP NAME Yes/No

10.5.10.9 Login Data Window


Objective:

The LOGIN DATA Window display all the User Account information and the relevant login data that
currently on going (console username, sector status, login time, logout time. Tube time).

Activation:
1. The ATCO with Supervisor power clicks on LOGIN DATA button of Supervisor Menu.

Results:
1. The following list is displayed:

Figure 177 - LOGIN DATA window

CONSOLE Node identifier


USERNAME
SEC STATUS Sector allocated on the node
TIME Time between the login and the logout

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 240 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.5.10.10 SNET Region Handling

See paragraph 10.13.5.

10.5.10.11 SNET Track Filtering


See paragraph 10.13.5.

10.5.10.12 Global Filter

Objective: Allows to filter the selected function on the whole system.

10.5.10.13 Aural Alerts Filter

Objective: Allows to filter the aural alarms for the selected alerts.

10.5.10.14 Runway in use

Objective:
The Runway in use order is used to change the default runway in use for the relevant Airport and
the state of all runways (departure(D), arrival(A), both(B), closed(C)).

Activation:
1. Click LB on the RWY IN USE button of the CONF menu,
2. Click LB on the name of the AIRPORT field of Runway List. opened: The window appears.
For each Runway select the state (departure(D), arrival(A), both(B), closed(C)).Change the default
runway in use for the relevant Airport by LB click on DEF DEP and DEF ARR columns.

Result:
The Runway in Use list is displayed on the CWP:

Figure 178 - Runway List

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 241 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The CHANGE RWY preview window is displayed:

Figure 179 - Change Runway window

1. The order is sent to FDP and runway parameters are modified in RUNWAY List; the SFPLs
trajectories are recalculated and the involved sub-system (AMAN, MTCD, SCA, etc) take into
account the modification.

Parameters:
RWY Runway
ST Runway state (departure(D), arrival(A), both(B), closed(C))
DEF DEP Departure default
DEF ARR Arrival default

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 242 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.6 Operational Windows And System Management


The following system data area and system information lists are displayed on the Air CWP:

Extended Name Icon Name


System Data and Message Area SDMA
Operational Display Area ODA
Diagnostic List DIAG
RWY List RWY

10.6.1 System Data and Message Area (SDMA)

Presentation All
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management Refer to paragraph SDMA is the title of the relevant
Window.
System SERVERS Main Sub-Systems Groups of four letters related to
Configuration (Servers) status: server computers; the first three
letters indicates the kind of server
 RDP,,
computer, the number indicates
 SFN, which the master computer is.
 GTW, The colours have the following
meaning:
 FDP,
 green: both master and
 MNA,
slave computers are on-
 DBH, line,
 LNR,  orange: degraded status,
i.e. the slave computer is
 MTC,
off-line
 CPDLC
 red: both the master and
slave host are off-line.
FILTERS Snet Alarm Status (Filters):  The Acronyms of the
Alarms are displayed in red
 STCA,
colours when the alarm
 MSAW, filters are enabled.
 APW,
 APAM,
 CLAM,
 RAM,

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 243 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

 MTCD.
AURAL  STCA, The Acronyms of the Alarms are
displayed in red colours when the
 MSAW,
acoustic alarm filters are enabled.
 APW,
 APAM,
 CLAM,
 RAM,
 MTCD.
LINES Line Status (Lines) The Acronyms of the lines are
displayed in dedicated colours
 AFTN,
according to the status.
 AIDC
The colours have the following
 AMHS meaning:
 green: for on-line status,
 orange: for degraded
status,
 red: for off-line.
RADAR STATUS Radar Heads status Radar identifier and selected
(RDP/DARD/SUPER radar channel
DARD)
Disseminator Status Physical workstation allocated as
disseminator of the radar
displayed above (only in DARD
status).

Table 25 SDMA Layout

Figure 180 - SDMA window

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 244 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.6.2 Operational Data Area (ODA)


Presentation All
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management ODA is the title of the
relevant Window.
Operational SUITE Suite Logical name
Configuration
Family name (ACC/APP/TWR)
Processing environment
indication (ONL/PLB)
Operative/Standby indication
(OPS/SBY)
SECTOR Sector Configuration Absorbed sector(s)
Arrows  Scroll Absorbed sector(s)
CWP Console Physical name
Console Logical name
Console ATC function
(EXE,PLN,EXE+PLN,WTC)

Privilege (SUP/MONITORING)
DATE Date DD/MM/YYYY
Printiing STRIP DEP Set the automatic print of
Departure SFPL strip
ENR Set the automatic print of En-
route SFPL strip
ARR Set the automatic print of
Arrival SFPL strip
PRINT ALL The PRINT ALL button allows
to print the complete screen
presentation and automatically
save a .gif image on a off-line
pre-defined path.
PRINT The PRINT button allows to
print a dedicated object on the
CWP (e.g. a list or a window)
and automatically save a .gif
image on an off-line pre-
defined path.

Figure 181 - ODA Layout

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 245 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 182 - ODA window

10.6.3 Diagnostic List (DIAG)


Presentation All
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management Refer to paragraph 5 DIAG is the title of the
relevant icon
Contains Diagnostic Messages

Figure 183 - Diagnostic List

When the diagnostic list is iconized, upon a response from MTCD try (e.g. NO MTCD CONFLICT/
CONFLICT ABSENT) the list automatically pop-up.

10.7 Lists Management


The following SFPL/radar information lists and tables are available on the Air CWP:
Acronym Extended Name
ARR Arrival list
DEP Departure list
FLDI Flight Directory list

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 246 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

SCL Sector list


PND Pending list
START-UP Start Up list
TAXI Taxi list
VFR Visual Flight Rule list
MODE-S Mode S List
RWY Runway List
HOL Holding List
SEL Special Entry list
CSL Coast list

Additional list provided:


CPDLC CPDLC list
COORD-IN Coordination In list
COORD-OUT Coordination Out list
MTCD MTCD list
MTCD Tent MTCD tentative list
ALM Alarm list
BRW Browse list

The following SFPL information related to a single SFPL are displayed on the CWP:
Acronym Extended Name
FHI Flight Hooked Information
FLDA Flight Data Page
FLM Flight Plan Message Page

The following graphical windows are displayed on the CWP:

Extended Name Icon Name


Vertical AID Window VAW
Glide Path Window GPW

The Flight State (FS) identifications displayed in the flight lists below are:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 247 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

I Inactive
PN Pending
AE Active En-route
AA Active Arrival
LE Live En-route
LT Live in TMA
LA Live in Approach
TL Terminated Landing
TE Terminated Exit
AV VFR Active
LV VFR Live

The RVSM Status indications displayed in the flight lists and windows below are:
W RVSM Approved,
S Non RVSM Approved and State Aircraft,
N Neither RVSM Approved nor State Aircraft
D Deprecated

Frequency Channel Spacing Status indications displayed in the flight lists and windows below are:
Y 8.33 equipped
U UHF equipped
N Neither

P-RNAV status indication displayed in the flight list and windows below are:
N
R
P Precision RNAV

The Mode S Equipped indications displayed in the flight lists, windows and Strip below are:
N Not Equipped,
I Transponder Mode S without the capability to send barometric quota.
S Transponder Mode S with the capability to send barometric quota.

The system sets automatically the XFL/PEL fields for each couple of sectors crossed by the
trajectory as calculated from Trajectory prediction whenever a flight is inserted or updated, unless an
XFL has been already manually set by the controller.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 248 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

In the case the sectors are crossed in horizontal plan the following rules are applied:
If the flight is climbing: the XFL/PEL is the crossing level rounded to the nearest ten Flight Level
(i.e. 10 FL) below.
If the flight is descending: the XFL/PEL is the crossing level rounded to the nearest ten Flight
Level (i.e. 10 FL) above.
If the flight is levelled: the XFL/PEL is the crossing level rounded to the nearest ten Flight Level
below (i.e. 10 FL).

In the case the sectors are crossed in vertical plan the following rules are applied:
If the flight is climbing (e.g. to the PFL) the XFL is the crossing level rounded to the nearest ten
Flight Level below (i.e. the highest FL available in the upstream – lower – sector).
If the flight is descending (i.e. arriving flight or to the next constraint) the XFL is the crossing level
rounded to the nearest ten Flight Level above (i.e. the lowest FL available in the upstream – upper
– sector).

10.7.1 Arrival List (ARR)


Presentation TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and PLN)
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management ARR is the title of relevant List
Contains The list contain:
 for APP and TWR: VFR and
IFR flights arriving/landed to
the controlled sector(s);
 for ACC: all flights
arriving/landed to Aerodromes
feeding the controlled ACC
sector(s).

Flight In An arriving flight is inserted in the list


when it becomes active
Flight Out A Flight is removed from the list when
a Landing Report (automatic or
manual) is performed or after a
manual
FPL Cancel.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 249 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Sorting The Flights in the LND list are sorted


according the following rules:
 ADES/ ETA (Destination
Airdrome then Estimated time
of Landing)
 ETL/ADES(Estimated time of
Landing then Destination
Airdrome)
 CALLSIGN
Filter All fields except ETL, CALLSIGN, and-
TYPE.
Fields Number in title area Number of flight inserted in the list

SORT: sorting rule


FILTER: Filter rule
ETL/ATL Estimated/Actual Time of Landing, if
Green the flight has
performed the Landing Report

CALLSIGN flight identification: Callsign


alphabetically
TYPE/W aircraft type/wake turbulence
category
RWY landing runway. On Tower position
the row relative to runway 11L/29R
is displayed with a different colour
then runway 11R/29L.
STAR Standard Instrumental Arrival Route

PEL Planned Entry Level


FR Flight rule
PB Parking Bay
REG NUM Registration Number
If the registration number is not
assigned for the relevant flight, the
field REGNUMB is showed in yellow
colour.
ADEP Departure Airport
ADES Destination Airport
Orders Refer “Flight Orders”

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 250 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 184 - Arrival List

Sensible fields of ARR List:


ADDRESSABL LB Button MB Button RB Button
E FIELD
SORT Change to sorting rules. It is
presented a menu containing
the available options.
FILTER Change to filtering rules. It is
presented a menu containing
the available fields to hide.
ETL To issue the Landing Report
Order.
CALLSIGN To recall Planner Menu. To recall Executive To recall Flight
Menu. Data Menu.
STAR To issue a Change STAR
order. Is displayed a choice
containing all STARs
connecting the joining point
with the selected runway.
PEL Start a Flight Level
Coordination;
PB To assign the Parking Bay

10.7.2 Departure List (DEP)


Presentation TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and PLN)
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management DEP is the title of the relevant Button
into the List menu
Contains  for APP and TWR,the list of the
flights departing/departed from
the controlled ATS Units;
 for ACC,the list of the flights
departing/departed from
Aerodromes feeding the

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 251 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

controlled ACC sector(s).


Flight In Upon distribution of the flight to the
TWR/APP sector.
Wake-up (Pending State) or
Clearance (Active State)
Flight Out TKF Report
Sorting  ADEP/RO/ETD Departure
airdrome then Received Order
then Estimated Time of
Departure
 ADEP/ETD/RO Departure
airdrome then Estimated Time
of Departure then Received
Order
 RO/ADEP/ETD Received Order
then Departure airdrome then
Estimated Time of Departure
 RO/ETD/ADEP Received Order
then Estimated Time of
Departure then Departure
airdrome
 ETD/ADEP/RO Estimated Time
of Departure then Departure
airdrome then Received Order
 ETD/RO/ADEP Estimated Time
of Departure then Received
Order then Departure
airdrome
 CALLSIGN Callsign
Filter All fields except EOBT, CTOT, ETD,
RECEIVED ORDER, FLIGHT
STATUS, CALLSIGN, TYPE, and
SSR.
Fields Number in title area Number of flight inserted in the list
SORT Sorting rule
FILTER Filter rule
EOBT Estimated Off-Block Time
CTOT Calculated take off time
ETD Estimate Time of Departure
RO Received Order.
It can be filled by the following
characters:
 “TX” in Yellow Taxi Order

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 252 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

received
 “ST” in Blue Start Up Order
received
FS Flight Status
CALLSIGN Flight Identification (if pink, the flight
is in advanced information)
TYPE/W aircraft type/ wake turbulence
category
SSRC SSR code
RWY Departure runway
SID Standard Instrumental Departure
CFL Cleared Flight Level
FR Flight rule
RVSM RVSM status.
833 Frequency Channel Spacing Status.
PB Parking Bay
ADEP Departure Airdrome
ADES Destination Airdrome
Orders Refer to “Flight Orders”

Figure 185 - Departure List

Sensible fields of DEP List:


ADDRESSABLE AB Button IB Button WB Button
FIELD
SORT Change to sorting rules. It is
presented a menu
containing the available
options.
FILTER Change to filtering rules. It
is presented a menu
containing the available
fields to hide.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 253 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

CALLSIGN To recall Planner Menu. To recall To recall Flight Data


Executive Menu. Menu.
RO To issue one of the
following orders:
 Start Up;
 Push Back;
 Taxi;
 Line Up
 Reset
EOBT To issue DCR Order
CFL To issue CFL order
PB To assign the Parking Bay
REG NUM To insert the Registration
Number
SID To issue a Change SID
order. It is presented a
choice containing all the
SID connecting the joining
point with the runway.

10.7.3 Flight Directory (FLDI)


Presentation TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and
PLN)
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management DIR is the title of the relevant Button into
the List menu
Contains All flights
(Pending/Active/Live/Terminate
d)
Flight In When the flight becomes
pending
Flight Out Flight cancellation
Sorting Callsign (alphabetical order) or When flights are sorted according to the
Owner Sector callsign the label CALLSIGN is displayed
in green while SCT is orange. When flights
are sorted according to the owner sector
the label SCT is displayed in green while
CALLSIGN is orange.
Filter Filter for FR and ASSR fields
Fields Number in title area Number of flight inserted in the list

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 254 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Filter: Filter rule


CALLSIGN Flight identification
SCT Sector
FR Flight rule
ASSR SSR code
Orders Refer to “Flight Orders”

Figure 186 - Flight Directory List

Sensible fields of FLIGHT DIRECTORY LIST:


ADDRESSABL LB Button MB Button RB Button
E FIELD
FILTER Change to filtering
rules. It is presented a
menu containing the
available fields to hide.
CALLSIGN To recall Planner To recall Executive To recall Flight
Menu. Menu. Data Menu.
CALLSIGN Enable the sorting rule
(heading) by Callsign
SCT (heading) Enable the sorting rule
by Sector

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 255 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.7.4 Sector List (SCL)


Presentation TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and
PLN)
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management SCL is the title of the relevant Button
into the List menu
Contains All flights normally displayed in all
the SILs of that sector and flights
under control of that sector
Flight In Flight activation and assume of
Control of the Flight
Flight Out Assume of Control from the next
sector or report on the last AoR
point (flight termination)
Sorting The following criteria are available:
 ETO/PEL/IFX Estimated
Time Over Inbound Fix then
Planned Entry Level then
Inbound Fix
 XFL/ETO/OFX Estimated
Time Over Outbound Fix then
Exit Flight Level then Outbound
Fix
 XFL/OFX/ETO Exit Flight
Level then Outbound Fix then
Estimated Time Over Outbound
Fix
 ETO/XFL/OFX Estimated
Time Over Outbound Fix then
Exit Flight Level then Outbound
Fix
 ETO/OFX/XFL Estimated
Time Over Outbound Fix then
Outbound Fix then Exit Flight
Level
 OFX/XFL/ETO Outbound Fix
then Exit Flight Level then
Estimated Time Over Outbound
Fix
 OFX/ETO/XFL Outbound Fix
then Estimated Time Over
Outbound Fix then Exit Flight

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 256 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Level
 CALLSIGN Callsign

FILTER All fields except Direction, Check


Mark, Correlation Mark, CALLSIGN,
ASSR, and PSSR.
Fields GG The symbol ““is displayed when a
new message comes in.

The symbol ““ is presented when a


coordination is performed (inter-sector
or inter-ATCU coordination), it can be
filled by the following code colour:
 Magenta blinking: Coordination-in
level transmitted
 Cyan blinking: Coordination-out
level received
 White: Coordination level
accepted
 Orange: Fault in FIR coordination
level transmitted

CALLSIGN Flight identifier


It can be filled by the following code
colour:
 Green: handover receiving flight
 Cyan:handover sending flight
 Pink: advanced information flight
 White: under control flight
ASSR Actual SSR code can be filled by the
following code colour
 Yellow : the SFPL/track linking is
performed according to previous
SSR code
BRNAV Information
8.33 Approval

8.33 Permission It can be filled by the following code


colour:
 Orange If the value is E
(Exempted) and K (Unknown)

FR Flight Rule

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 257 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

ADEP Aerodrome of Departure


IN FIX Sector entry point can be filled by the
following code colour:
 Overdue Correlation (when the
entering flight is not correlated to
any track the field assumes the
yellow colour)
Estimated time on sector entry point It can be filled by the following code
colour:
 Green: reporting over the point
OUT FIX Sector exit point can be filled by the
following code colour:
 Lateral deviation detection (or
potential coordination failure if the
yellow colour is activated together
with the yellow in the XFL field)
Estimated time on sector exit point It can be filled by the following code
colour:
 Green: reporting over the point
REGN Registration number: if the
registration number is not assigned
for the relevant flight, the field
REGNUMB is showed in yellow
colour.
PSSR Previous SSR Code
TYPE Aircraft Type
W Wake Turbulence Category
ADES Aerodrome of Destination
Inbound Supplementary FL
Attitude indicator from
Supplementary Flight Level.
PEL Planned entry Level can be filled by
the following code colour:
 Green: coordination-in level
received
 Cyan: coordination-out level
transmitted
 White: coordination level accepted
 Yellow: vertical deviation detection
Outbound Supplementary FL.
Attitude indicator from
Supplementary Flight Level.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 258 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

XFL Exit Flight level can be filled by the


following code colour:
 Green : coordination-in level
received
 Cyan: coordination-out level
transmitted
 Orange: fault in FIR coordination
level transmitted
 White: coordination level accepted
 Yellow: combined with the yellow
in the OUT FIX field indicates a
Potential coordination Failure
Orders Refer to “Flight Orders”

Figure 187 - Sector List

Sensible fields of SCL List:


ADDRESSABLE LB Button MB Button RB Button
FIELD
SORT Change to sorting rules. It is
presented a menu containing
the available options.
FILTER Change to filtering rules. It is
presented a menu containing
the available fields to hide.
CALLSIGN To recall Planner Menu. To recall To recall Flight
Executive Menu. Data Menu.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 259 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

ADEP To activate: To enable the


 DCR order if the flight is Editing Menu
outbound
 RCR order if the flight is
inbound or overfly
ADES ACR order if the flight is To open FLDA
landing to local Airport. Window
OUTFIX To activate REP Order Press and Hold
to display the
Flight Leg
PEL Depending on the context:
 To change the CFL
 To start a Flight Level
Coordination;
 To respond (accept, Reject
or counter-propose) to a
received Flight Level
Coordination request.
XFL Depending on the context:
 To start a Flight Level
Coordination;
 To respond (accept, Reject
or counter-propose) to a
received Flight Level
Coordination request.

10.7.5 Pending List (PND)


Presentation TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and PLN)
Number 1

Background Opaque

Management Refer to paragraph PND is the title of the relevant


Button into the List menu
Contains All flights Notified Pending, Inbound
Pending and all flights in PENDING
State departing from airport within the
AoI.
Flight In Upon insertion of the Pending Flight

Flight Out When flight becomes active.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 260 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Sorting None

Filter None

Fields Number in title area Number of flight inserted in


the list
CALLSIGN Flight identifier
It can be filled by the
following code colour:
 Pink: Flight in advanced
information
 Light green: Notified and
AOI only flights
 Light Grey: All other Flights
SCT Owner Sector
ETI/ETD Estimated time of
Departure/Estimated Time of
Arrival
Orders Refer to paragraph “Flight Orders”

Figure 188 - Pending List

Sensible fields of PND List:


ADDRESSABLE FIELD LB Button MB Button RB Button

CALLSIGN To open FFP mask To display


Trajectory

10.7.6 Start-up List (STARTUP)


Presentation TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and PLN)
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management STARTUP is the title of the relevant
Button into the List menu

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 261 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Contains All Departing flights in pending or


active status
Flight In Upon insertion of a departing flight
(pending or active) that have not
received the Start up Clearance
Flight Out After the release of STARTUP clearance
or when the flight assumes the Live
status after a Take Off orders.
Sorting The following criteria are available:
- CTOT/CALLSIGN Calculation Take Off
Time then callsign;
- CALLSIGN- Flight identifier.

Filter Filter for the following fields:


ADEP, ADES, ATYPE, TIME (takeoff
or landing), RWY, REG, WTC, SSR,
SID/STAR, CFL.
Fields Number in title area Number of flight inserted in the list
STATUS Flight Status
CALLSIGN Flight identifier
ADEP Departure Airdrome
ADES Airdrome of Destination
TYPE Aircraft Type
PB Parking Bay
TIME takeoff or landing time
RWY departure runway
REG NUM Registration Number
If the registration number is not
assigned for the relevant flight, the
field REGNUMB is showed in yellow
colour.
WTC Wake turbulence category
SSR SSR Code

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 262 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

SID/STAR Standard Instrument Departure/


Standard instrument Arrival

CFL Cleared Flight Level


CTOT Calculation Take Off Time

Orders Refer to “Flight Orders”

Figure 189 - Start-Up List

Sensible fields of STARTUP List:


ADDRESSABLE LB Button MB Button RB Button
FIELD
SORT Change to sorting rules.
It is presented a menu
containing the available
options.

CALLSIGN To recall Planner Menu. To recall Executive To recall Flight Data


Menu. Menu.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 263 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.7.7 Taxi List (TAXI)


Presentation TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and PLN)
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management TAXI is the title of the relevant
Button into the List menu
Contains All Departing and arrival flights
Flight In All Departing flights in pending or
active status
Flight Out After the release of TAXI clearance or
when the flight assumes the Live
status after a Take Off orders.
Sorting The following criteria are available:
 Flight Status
 TIME
 ADEP Departure Airdrome
 ADES Aerodrome of Destination
 CALLSIG- Callsign
Filter Filter for CFL and SID/STAR fields
Fields Number in title area Number of flight inserted in the list
STATUS Flight Status
CALLSIGN Flight identifier
ADEP Departure Airdrome
ADES Airdrome of Destination
TYPE Aircraft Type
PB Parking Bay
TIME takeoff or landing time
RWY departure runway
REG NUM Registration Number
If the registration number is not
assigned for the relevant flight, the
field REGNUMB is showed in yellow
colour.
WTC Wake turbulence category
SSR SSR Code

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 264 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

SID/STAR Standard Instrument Departure/


Standard instrument Arrival

CFL Cleared Flight Level


CTOT Calculation Take Off Time
Orders Refer to “Flight Orders”

Figure 190 - Taxi List

Sensible fields of TAXI List:


ADDRESSABLE LB Button MB Button RB Button
FIELD
SORT Change to sorting
rules. It is presented a
menu containing the
available options.
FILTER Change to filtering
rules. It is presented a
menu containing the
available fields to hide.
CALLSIGN To recall Planner To recall Executive To recall Flight
Menu. Menu. Data Menu.

10.7.8 Visual Flight Rule List (VFR)

Presentation TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and PLN)


Number 1
Background Opaque
Management VFR is the title of the relevant
Button into the List menu

Contains All arrival and departing flights having


for the related Airports
Flight In A flight is inserted in the VFR List as
soon as it assumes the active Status
Flight Out A flight is removed from the VFR List
as soon as it assumes the
Terminated Status.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 265 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Sorting The following criteria are available:


- CALLSIGN- Flight identifier.
Filter N.A
Fields Number in title area Number of flight inserted in the list

CALLSIGN Flight identifier


TYPE Aircraft Type
ADEP Departure Airdrome
ADES Airdrome of Destination
CFL Cleared Flight Level
TIME Takeoff or Landing time
Orders Refer to paragraph 7 “Flight Orders”

Figure 191 - Vfr List

Sensible fields of VFR List:


ADDRESSABLE LB Button MB Button RB Button
FIELD
SORT Change to sorting rules.
It is presented a menu
containing the available
options.

CALLSIGN To recall Planner Menu. To recall Executive To recall Flight Data


Menu. Menu.

10.7.9 Mode-S Directory List (MODE-S)


Presentation TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 266 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

PLN)
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management Refer to paragraph §10.11 MODOS is the title of the relevant
Button into the List menu
Contains All the Flights Mode-S equipped with-
the relevant information available
from Mode-S link.
Flight In As soon as the track contains the
Mode S information
Flight Out As soon as the Mode S information
is not available yet
Sorting The only possible sorting in the Mode-S
List is by Callsign.
Fields SSR SSR Code
RCS Received Callsign
ICAO Icao Address (24 bit)
GR SPD Ground Speed
SAL Selected Altitude
CMH Calculated Magnetic Heading
IAS Air Speed (Indicated Airspeed)
MHDG Magnetic Heading
V.RATE Vertical Rate
MACH Air Speed (Mach number)
T-ANGLE True Track Angle
CC Communication Capability
R.ANGLE Roll Angle
T.A.RATE Track Angle Rate
MORE/Less To display the extended/reduced list
button format.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 267 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 192 - Example Of Mode-S Directory List

10.7.10 Runway List (RWY)


Presentation TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and PLN)

Number 1

Background Opaque

Management RWY is the title of the relevant


Button into the List menu.
Contains For each airport inside the fir,
contains all default runway of
departure and landing.
Fields AIRP Airport

DEP Departure runway


ARR Arrival runway.

Figure 193 - Runway List

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 268 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Sensible fields of Runway List:


ADDRESSABLE LB Button MB Button RB Button
FIELD
AIRP To Open the Change
Runway window.

10.7.11 Holding List (HOLDING)


Presentation TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and PLN)
Number 1
Background Transparent
Management HLD is the title of the relevant
Button into the List menu
Contains All flights in HOLDING status in the
controlled Sector
Flight In Upon insertion of the Flight in Holding
status.
Flight Out Upon exit/cancellation of the Holding
status.
Sorting The following criteria are available:
 HFX/AFL/HLDE-Holding Fix then
Actual Flight Level then Holding
Exit Time
 HFX/HLDE/AFL-Holding Fix then
Holding Exit Time then Actual
Flight Level
 AFL/HFX/HLDE-Actual Flight Level
then Holding Fix then Holding Exit
Time
 AFL/HLDE/HFX-Actual Flight Level
then Holding Exit Time then
Holding Fix
 HLDE/HFX/AFL-Holding Exit Time
then Holding Fix then Actual Flight
Level
 HLDE/AFL/HFX-Holding Exit Time
then Actual Flight Level then
Holding Fix
 CALLSIGN-Callsign
Filter N.A.
Fields Number in title area Number of Flights inserted in the
FIX table

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 269 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

HLD: xxxxx Holding point(s)


SORT Sort criteria
SEARCH Search criteria
NR List number
H_FIX Holding fix
CALLSIGN Flight identification
It can be filled by the following code
colour:
 White for Owned flight
 Pink for Flight in advance
coordination
CFL Cleared Flight level
HLDE Holding exit time
AFL Actual Flight Level
ADES Destination Airport
Buttons  Iconize button
?/# Join button. “?” mean joined to the
referring fix. # means not joined

 Down scrolling arrow


 Up scrolling arrow
Orders Refer to paragraph 7 “Flight Orders”

Figure 194 - Holding List

Sensible fields of HLD List:


ADDRESSABLE LB Button MB Button RB Button
FIELD
CALLSIGN To recall Planner Menu. To recall Executive To recall Flight Data
Menu. Menu.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 270 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

H_FIX (in the List To ungroup the HLD


header) tables related to
different Holding
Fixes
CFL Modify the CFL

10.7.12 Special Entry List (SEL)


Presentation
TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and
PLN)
Number 1
Background Transparent
Management SEL is the title of the relevant Button
into the List menu
Contains All flights VFR or IFR without Route
(i.e. Route not Checked) belonging
to the sector
Flight In A flight is inserted in the SEL of the
first responsible sector as soon as it
is pre-activated and in the SEL list of
receiving sectors during transfer of
control (after the TOC of the
transferring sector).
Flight Out A flight is removed from the SEL
after a Cancellation order and from
the SEL list of the transferring sector
after the AOC order of the receiving
sector.
Sorting Flights are ordered with respect to
the field CALLSIGN or TIME that is
the estimated inbound time or
estimate departure time or actual
time during TOC..
Fields Number in title area Number of Flights inserted in the FIX
table
ETI/ETD/ATT Estimated inbound time or estimate
departure time or actual time during
TOC
CALLSIGN Flight identification
CFL Cleared flight level
ADEP Departing Aerodrome
ADES Destination Aerodrome

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 271 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

FR Flight rules
SSR SSR code
Buttons  Iconize button
 Down scrolling arrow
 Up scrolling arrow

Figure 195 - Special Entry List

Sensible fields of SEL List:


ADDRESSABLE LB Button MB Button RB Button
FIELD
CALLSIGN To recall Planner Menu. To recall Executive To recall Flight Data
Menu. Menu.
CFL Modify the CFL

10.7.13 Coast List Table (CSL)


Presentation TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and
PLN)
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management Refer to paragraph 5 CSL is the title of the relevant Button into
the List menu
Contains All the flights in coast status
Flight In Upon de-correlation of SFPL
from track
Flight Out Upon correlation of SFPL to track
Filter N.A.
Fields Number in title area Number of Flights inserted in the table

CALLSIGN Flight identification


SSR SSR Code

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 272 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

CFL Cleared Flight Level


COORD Coordination status
Buttons  Iconize button
 Down scrolling arrow
 Up scrolling arrow

Figure 196 - Coast List

10.7.14 Browse List (BRW)

Presentation ALL (on request)


Number 1
Background Opaque
Management
Contains All flights in Inactive State
Selection  CALLSIGN selection method
Method
 ADEP selection method
 ADES selection method
 First Fix Time(FFT)/EOBT RANGE
selection method
Flight In N.A.
Flight Out N.A.
Sorting CALLSIGN (alphabetical order)
Filter N.A.
Fields MORE DATA /NO MORE DATA The browse list contains more page or
it does not contains any more page
SELECTION CRITERIA
CALLSIGN Callsign or part of it
DEP Departure Airport or part of it
DES Destination Airport or part of it

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 273 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

ETF/EOBT RANGE Minimum estimated Time over the first


point/Minimum Estimated off block
Time
Maximum estimated Time over the first
point/Maximum Estimated off block
Time
UP Previous page
DOWN Next page
FLIGHTS DATA
M The flags m or c indicates if the flight is
modified or deleted from the inactive
data base.
FR Flight rules
CALLSIGN Flight identification
TYPE Aircraft type
TAS True air speed over the referred
reporting point
DEP Departure aerodrome
ROUTE Route
DES Destination aerodrome
EOBT Off-block time
ETF Time over the first point
SSR SSR code

Figure 197– Browse List

Sensible fields of BROWSE List:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 274 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

ADDRESSABLE FIELD AB Button


UP Previous page
DOWN Next page

10.7.15 Flight Hooked Information (FHI)


Presentation TWR, APP and ACC Note
Number 1 (for Pending/Active/Live/Terminated
flights)
Background Transparent
Management Opened on Hook of an SFPL
Contains SFPL data
Flight In N.A.
Flight Out N.A.
Sorting N.A.
SFields CALLSIGN Aircraft Identification
ASSR SSR Code Mode A
NSSR Following SSR
ADEP Departure Airport
ADES Destination Airport
DDMMAA Date
REGNUMB Registration Number
FR Flight Rule
AFL Actual Flight Level (AFL or LVL in
case of lack of Mode C
information);
PEL Planned Entry Level
CFL Cleared Flight Level
R RVSM status.
8 833 Frequency Channel Spacing
Status.
E
B BRNAV/PRNAV Status
M MDS status
TYPE/W aircraft type/wake category
PFL Planned flight level
SID/STAR Standard Instrumental Route or

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 275 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

FRM Formation
→← Lateral Deviation
P/NP Flight Permit Indication
GGSP Ground Speed
XFL Exit Flight Level
FREE TEXT Free Text
STSF18 STS information from field 18
MIL Military Area Violation
STR Strategic Constraint Violation
AHDG1 Heading
AM
TDIR Track Direction
CCR ROC/ROD
FFS Flight Status
EXPOI Exit Point from SCT and FIR
MODE-S SECTION
CSREC Received Callsign (It is displayed
in yellow when there is a
Received Callsign Deviation
warning)
SEL Selected Altitude (It is displayed
in yellow when there is a
Selected Altitude Deviation
warning)
MAGN Magnetic Heading
MACHS Air Speed (Mach number)
KNOT Air Speed (Indicated Airspeed). It
is displayed in yellow when there
is a received Speed warning
V RATE Vertical Rate
ROUTE SECTION
ROB1 Route string 1 (H and S type
points are not displayed)
ROB2 Route string 2 (H and S type
points are not displayed)
ROB3 Route string 3 (H and S type
points are not displayed)
ROB4 Route string 4 (H and S type

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 276 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

points are not displayed)


AIDCSECTION
IN: ACC AIDCmessage when the FIR is
accepting the flight from the
previous FIR.
OUT: TRA AIDC message when the FIR is
transferring the flight to the next
FIR.
SECTORS Chain of the FIR sector.
AMENDMENT ICAO SECTION
FIELD 10A Display the field 10A information if present. RCN eqp.
FIELD 10B Display the field 10B information if present. SSR eqp.
FIELD 18 Display the field 18 information if present. PBN/ COM/ NAV/ DAT/ STS/

MODE-S Warning presentation on the FHI: If a mismatch is detected between the mode-s
data and flight plan data, on the FHI will be displayed a yellow square around the relevant
field to alert the controller. (In the example of Fig.24 there is a mismatch between the
received Callsign and the Callsign of the linked flight plan).

Figure 198 - Fhi Layout

Drop Down Button for the opening the extra information.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 277 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 199 - New Fhi Layout For Extended Case

Full Equipment Amendment ICAO presentation: The additional flight plan information regarding
the new amendment ICAO will be presented on the Flight hooked information when it is in extended
mode. By clicking on a Drop Down button the extra information are visualized.

10.7.16 Alarm List (RDPAL)

Presentation All
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management ALRM is the title of the relevant icon
Contains EMG Red colour
RCF Red colour
HIJ Red colour
STCA Red colour
MSAW Red colour
APW Red colour
APAM Red colour
OUT Red colour
ICM Red colour
RADAR/ADS-B- Red colour
OFF/ON

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 278 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

CPDLC
PEN
Fields ACK Acknowledge Alarm
CALLSIGN1 call-sign or SSR code of the first conflicting flight
CALLSIGN2 call-sign or SSR code of the second conflicting
(CS2)/AREA flight/infringed area identifier
TYPE Conflict type:
STCA
MSAW
APW
APAM
URG Urgency flag:
PRE (preactivation)
ACT (Actual)
LAT( Late)
SUS (suspend)
ALT1 Actual flight level of the first conflicting flight
ALT2 Actual flight level of the second conflicting flight
CL1 Attitude indicator of the first conflicting flight
CL2 Attitude indicator of the second conflicting flight
SCT1 Owner sector of the first conflicting flight
SCT2 Owner sector of the second conflicting flight
DIST Distance between the two aircraft
MIND Minimum predicted separation
TIME Conflict time (predicted time for separation infringement)
AIRPORT Airport Identifier (only for Apam)
RWY Runway Identifier (only for Apam)
V.DEV Vertical deviation (only for Apam)
L.DEV Lateral deviation (only for Apam)
C.NUM Conflict Number

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 279 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 200 - Alarm List

10.7.17 Mtcd List(MTCD)


Presentation APP and ACC (EXE and PLN)
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management MTCD is the title of the relevant icon
Contains All flights under MTCD Conflict and Risk conflict are displayed
conflict/risk condition in own using different colours :
sector  Red for Conflict,
 Yellow for Risk
Flight In Conflict/risk Detection
Flight Out Conflict/risk End or Time
Expired
Sorting Time (relative time) to first
infringement (smaller on top)
Fields TIME Time to first infringement
ID Conflict number
C (#) Identification indicating that this aircraft is
involved in more than one conflict.
CallSign1 SFPL identification
C (#) Identification indicating that this aircraft is
involved in more than one conflict.
CallSign2 AREA SFPL identification or SUA
DIST Calculated minimum distance at TFI
CFLCT Conflict Time
TMD Time of Minimum Distance
RISK button RISK To filter out Risks from the list
MORE/LESS MORE/LESS To display DIST and MIN DIST fields in
button the list

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 280 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

TIME button TIME Filter conflicts according to time


parameter on EXE or PLN position

Figure 201 - Extended Mtcd List

Figure 202 -Mtcd Reduced List

Sensible fields of MTCD LIST :

ADDRESSABLE FIELD AB Button


MORE/LESS Enable the Extended/limited MTCD list presentation.
Enable/disable the Risk warning presentation in the
RISK
MTCD list
Label/CALSIG1/ 2 Enable the permanent PODFL presentation
TIME button enable/disable, on PLN position, a filter to
display only conflicts that are a VSP conflicts time (e.g. 5
min) after the current time.
TIME
TIME button enable /disable, on EXE Position, a filter to
display only conflicts that are between the current time
and VSP conflict time (e.g. 5 min).

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 281 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.7.18 Flight Plan Extended Data List (FLDA)

Presentation ALL (on request)


Number Up to 3
Background Opaque
Management Refer to paragraph 5
Contains All flight plan data
Flight In N.A.
Flight Out N.A.
Sorting N.A.
Fields FS Flight Status
FR Flight Rules
CALLSIGN Flight Identifier
TYPE Aircraft Type
W wake turbulence category
TAS True air speed (in Knots).
ADEP Departure Aerodrome
EOBT Estimated off-block time
ADES Destination Aerodrome
PFL Planned flight level
SSR SSR code
DATE Date
833 8.33 status and permission
R
B
M
ROUTE Route
FIX Fix name
F Fix type:
 I = AOI fix
 F = fix, generic point, aerodrome,
airway’s fix, SID’s fix, STAR’s fix,
runway’s fix
 R = top of climbing or top of descent
point
 X = change sector point

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 282 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

ETO Estimated/actual time over the point


XLV Planned/actual flight level over the point
Attitude (A) Asset arrow over the point:
  climbing
  descending
 = levelled up

SEC Responsible Sector


Partial Distance (PDIS) Distance From The Preceding Point
Partial Time (PTIM) Time From The Preceding Point
Cumulative Distance (CDIS) Total Distance From The First Point
Displayed
Cumulative Time (CTIM) Total Time From The First Point Displayed
TAS/GSP Requested True Air Speed/Ground Speed

Figure 203 - Flight Data Page List

10.7.19 Flight Plan Message List (FPLM)


Presentation ALL (on request)
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management Refer to paragraph 5

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 283 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Contains All the original AFTN message that generated the flight plan
Flight In N.A.
Flight Out N.A.
Sorting N.A.
Fields Flight Plan Message

Figure 204 - Flight Plan Message Page

10.7.20 Vertical Aid Window (VAW)


Presentation TWR, APP and ACC (EXE and PLN)
Number Up to a 4 number on each CWP
Background Opaque
Management VAW is the title of the relevant
Button into the Flight Data menu.
The VAW presents a horizontal line
for each step level. The steps are
updated dynamically as soon as the
vertical zoom window is updated.
Contains  the selected flight predicted  The trajectory vertical profile is
vertical trajectory profile; displayed as a line in a green
 the context traffic band colour.
occupation(including all typology  The vertical axis on the right
of MTCD conflicts); present the CFL/PEL/XFL values
 the CFL/PEL and XFL vertical  Dedicated colours will be used in
axis and their values; the Vertical Aids Window to
 the time interval horizontal axis show:
and their values;  predicted conflict – Red;
 the current track position of the  risk of conflict – Yellow;
selected flight.  potential conflict – Blue.
 The frame of space
corresponding to the sector

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 284 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

owner of flight will be visualized


in a gray colour.
Buttons G To show/hide the flight level
horizontal lines
T To restore the axes default setting
(zoom, position)
C  to re-centre the vertical axis;
 to re-centre and to re store the
default value for the vertical axis
(if reconfigured)
horizontal slider (at top of window) Zoom the horizontal axis

vertical Slider (at left of window) Zoom the vertical axis

horizontal Scroll bar Scrolling capabilities along


horizontal axis
vertical Scroll bar Scrolling capabilities along vertical
axis between the ground level and
FL650
Orders Refer to paragraph “Flight Orders”

Figure 205 - Vertical Aid Window

10.7.21 Glide Path Window (GPW)


Presentation TWR
Number 4 (one for each runway)

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 285 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Background Opaque
Management Refer to paragraph 5
Contains Glide path Cone for each
landing runway and the
horizontal e vertical profile of all
arrival flights
Buttons Setting Direction Setting
Map Map presentation
LN: Label Line Selection
SPV Speed Vector Enable
1,2,3,4,5 Speed Vector Selection
Orders Refer to “Flight Orders”

Figure 206 - Glide Path Cone Window

10.7.22 CPDLC HISTORY WINDOW

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 286 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Presentation Sector owner of the flighta


Number one
Background Opaque
Management Refer Windows Management Paragraph
Contains All the CPDLC Messages, related to closed
dialogues, exchanged with the relevant Flight
with the related time of sending or reception
Sorting  sending time for the Uplink messages;
 receipt time for Downlink messages.
Fields Number in title area Number of
messages
contained in the list
CALLSIGN in title area Callsign of the
Flight
TIME Related time
MESSAGE SENT/RECEIVED CPDLC Messages
related to closed
dialogues are
displayed in white
colour

Figure 207 - CPDLC History Window

10.7.23 DL flight List

Presentation The Sector involved (It’s flights)


Number 1
Attribute Opaque
Opening/Updat Refer Windows Management Paragraph
e
Contains All the flights which have:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 287 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

 performed the logon and


 which are in controlled status or having
the trajectory of interest for the relevant
Sector
Flight In After the CPDLC logon and if in controlled status
or having the trajectory of interest for the relevant
Sector.
Flight Out Flight Cancellationor Transferred
Fields CALLSIGN CallSign
CCS CPDLC Connection Status
CFS CPDLC Function Status
U CPDLC Uplink Dialogue
Status
D CPDLC Downlink Dialogue
Status
E Aircraft Emergency Status
CAD CAD message status
NDA NDA message status
Sorting CallSign
DL Flight List

Figure 208 - DL Flight List (example)

Operations on Fields:
CALLSIGN: clicking with the IB button the History By Callsign is available
U: when the flight is controlled and the CCS status is connected, clicking with the AB the
CPLDC ORDERS pop up menu is available.
D: when the down arrow is present you can open the CPDLC response mask.

10.7.24 CPDLC MESSAGE WINDOWS


The CPDLC Messages Window contains all the CPDLC dialogues.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 288 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The dialogues are grouped in two different sub-windows, one containing all the ground-initiated
dialogues and, one containing all the air-initiated dialogues.
The two windows are described in the following sub-paragraphs.

10.7.24.1 CPDLC Message In Window


The CPDLC Message In Window contains all the messages related to Air-Initiated dialogues and
Error Messages in Downlink.
Each item displayed in the Window has the following layout:

Presentation Owner Sector


Number 1
Attribute Opaque
Contains All the messages received for flights in:
 controlled status
 connected (logon executed)
Flight In N.A.
Flight Out N.A.
Fields CALLSIGN Flight Identifier
Time related to the Request
reception:
 Magenta for received
message which requires an
answer
TIME  White for received message
which does not require an
answer or for received
message after the response
 Red in case of Error or
TimeOut
Type of message send:
 Magenta for received
message which requires an
answer (blinking until ack)
 White for received message
MESSAGE which does not require an
answer (blinking until ack) or
for received message after
the response
 Red in case of Error or
TimeOut
Text Field:
STANDBY
 Yellow after execution of

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 289 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

SBY
 Red in case of error or
timeout
Text Field:
UNABLE  yellow in case of Unable
execution. Red in case of
error or timeout
Sorting CallSign

Figure 209 - Example of CPDLC Message In Window


The following Table summarizes the orders allocations and interaction on the item fields of the
CPDLC Message In Window.

ADDRESSABLE FIELD LB Button


CALLSIGN To acknowledge the reception of a message
To send a StandBy Message for the received
STANDBY
request.
To send an Unable Message for the received
UNABLE
request.
MESSAGE To send an answer to a downlink request.

10.7.24.2 CPDLC Message Out Window

The CPDLC Message Out Window contains all the messages related to Ground-Initiated
dialogues and all the Error Messages in Uplink.
Each item displayed in the Window has the following layout:

Presentation Owner Sector


Number 1
Attribute Opaque
Contains All the messages send for flights in:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 290 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

 controlled status
 connected (logon executed)
Flight In N.A.
Flight Out N.A.
Fields CALLSIGN Green for sentmessage and red in
case of Error
Time related to the Request
reception:
TIME  Cyan for send messages in
open status
 Red in case of Error,
UNABLE, TimeOut
Type of message send:
 Cyan for send messages in
MESSAGE open status
 Red in case of Error,
UNABLE, TimeOut
Text Field:
WLC  White colour if a WILCO has
been received for the
relevant message.
Text Field:
 Cyan colour if a STANDBY
SBY has been received for the
relevant message.
 Red in case of error or
timeout
Text Field:
 Red colour if a UNABLE has
UNB been received for the
relevant message.
 Red in case of error or
timeout
Text Field:
ERR
 Red.
Sorting CallSign
CPDLC Message Out Window fields Identification

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 291 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 210 - Example of CPDLC Message Out Window

10.8 Electronic Strip Bay


All the strips under the controller management are listed in the Electronic Strip Bay (ESB) which
includes up to 22 displayable strips (system parameter).
If the number of the strips in ESB exceeds the maximum number it is possible to scroll the ESB by
a vertical scrollbar located in the right side bay.
The total number of strips contained in the ESB is displayed in the title area.
Strips are grouped as follows:
En-route strips, related to flights overflying the sector;
Arrival strips, related to flights arriving to an Aerodrome inside the sector;
Departure strips, related to flights departing from an Aerodrome inside the sector
Each group of strips is identified by a "strip separator". A strip separator is created on the insertion
of the first strip in its group and it is deleted when the last strip of its group is removed.
The strip separators contain a label identifying the type of flight strips and the number of strips
belonging to that group.
The possible labels are:
DEP: if the group is composed by departing flights strips,
ARR: if the group is composed by arriving flights strips,
ENR: if the group is composed by en-route flights strips.
Strips (flight strips and label strips) in the ESB are contiguously displayed; in case of insertion or
removing of a strip the remaining strips are automatically re-arranged.
Each single strip can be displayed in a reduced or full layout clicking on the Strip Control field.
The ESB can be configured to display all strips in reduced layout or in the full layout by means of a
mouse interaction on the ESB sort button
The quick search text box is present on the top of the ESB
Upon the insertion of a letter/number into the quick search text box the ESB displays in
alphabetically order by callsign the Strip matching with the values inserted moving them on the top.
Of the ESB

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 292 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 211 - Electronic Strip Bay

10.8.1 Electronic Strip Layouts on Tower Position

10.8.1.1 DEP Electronic Strip

The Full Electronic Strip for Pending Departure Flight on Tower position is the following:

ATYPE/WT SID RWY ETD STUP PUSH TAXI


ASSR TAS
CFL ST time PB time TX time
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN REG NUMBER FR
Date ADEP ADES XFL FREE TEXT rvsm 833 rnav mds
Figure 212 – Full Pending DEP Strip on TWR

The Reduced Electronic Strip for Pending Departure Flight on Tower position is the following:

ATYPE/WT SID RWY ETD STUP PUSH TAXI


TAS
CFL ST time PB time TX time
ASSR
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN XFL REG NUMBER FR

Figure 213 – Reduced Pending DEP Strip on TWR

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 293 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The Full Electronic Strip for Departing Flight on Tower Position is the following:

ATYPE/WT SID RWY ETD STUP PUSH TAXI


ASSR TAS
CFL ST time PB time TX time
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN REG NUMBER FR
Date ADEP ADES XFL FREE TEXT rvsm 833 rnav mds

Figure 214 – Full Dep Strip on TWR

The Reduced Electronic Strip for Departing Flight on Tower Position is the following:

ATYPE/WT SID RWY STUP PUSH TAXI


ASSR TAS CFL ST time PB time TX time
NSSR RFL CALLSIGN XFL REG NUMBER FR
Figure 215 – Reduced Dep Strip on TWR

10.8.1.2 ARR Electronic Strip

The Full Electronic Strip for Pending Arrival Flight on Tower Position is the following:

ATYPE/WT STAR RWY FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


ASSR TAS
CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN REG NUMBER FR
Date ADEP ADES XFL FREE TEXT rvsm 833 rnav mds
Figure 216 – Full Pending ARR Strip on APP

The Reduced Electronic Strip for Pending Arrival Flight on Tower Position is the following:

ATYPE/WT STAR RWY FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


TAS CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
ASSR
CALLSIGN
NSSR RFL XFL REG NUMBER FR

Figure 217 – Reduced Pending ARR Strip on APP

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 294 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The Full Electronic Strip for Arriving Flight on Tower Position is the following:

ATYPE/WT STAR RWY FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


ASSR TAS
CFL ETO 1 ETO2 ETO3 ETO4
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN REG NUMBER FR
Date ADEP ADES XFL FREE TEXT rvsm 833 rnav mds
Figure 218 – Full Arr Strip

The Reduced Electronic Strip for Arriving Flight on Tower Position is the following:

ATYPE/WT STAR RWY FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


ASSR TAS
CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN XFL REG NUMBER FR
Figure 219 – Reduced Arr Strip

10.8.2 Electronic Strip Layouts on Approach Position


10.8.2.1 DEP Electronic Strip

The Full Electronic Strip for Pending Departure Flight on approach position is the following:

ATYPE/WT SID RWY FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


ASSR TAS
CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN REG NUMBER FR
Date ADEP ADES XFL FREE TEXT rvsm 833 rnav mds
Figure 220 – Full Pending DEP Strip on APP

The Reduced Electronic Strip for Pending Departure Flight on approach position is the following:

ATYPE/WT SID RWY FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


ASSR TAS
CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN REG NUMBER FR
Date ADEP ADES XFL FREE TEXT rvsm 833 rnav mds
Figure 221 – Reduced Pending DEP Strip on APP

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 295 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The Full Electronic Strip for Departure Flight on approach position is the following:

ATYPE/WT SID RWY FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


ASSR TAS
CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN REG NUMBER FR
Date ADEP ADES XFL FREE TEXT rvsm 833 rnav mds
Figure 222 – Full DEP Strip on APP

The ReducedElectronic Strip for Departure Flight on approach position is the following:

ATYPE/WT SID RWY FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


TAS
CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
ASSR
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN XFL REG NUMBER FR

Figure 223 – Reduced DEP Strip on APP

10.8.2.2 ARR Electronic Strip

The Full Electronic Strip for Pending ArrivalFlight on approach position is the following:

ATYPE/WT SID RWY FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


ASSR TAS
CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN REG NUMBER FR
Date ADEP ADES XFL FREE TEXT rvsm 833 rnav mds
Figure 224 – Full Pending DEP Strip on APP

The Reduced Electronic Strip for Pending Arrival Flight on approach position is the following:

ATYPE/WT SID RWY FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


TAS
CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
ASSR
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN XFL REG NUMBER FR

Figure 225 – Reduced Pending DEP Strip on APP

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 296 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The Full Electronic Strip for Arriving Flight on approach position is the following:

ATYPE/WT STAR RWY FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


ASSR TAS
CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN REG NUMBER FR
Date ADEP ADES XFL FREE TEXT rvsm 833 rnav mds
Figure 226 – FullARR Strip on APP
The Reduced Electronic Strip for Arriving Flight on approach position is the following:

ATYPE/WT STAR RWY FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


TAS
CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
ASSR
NSSR RFL
CALLSIGN XFL REG NUMBER FR

Figure 227 – Reduced ARR Strip on APP

10.8.3 Electronic Strip Layouts on ACC Position


10.8.3.1 DEP Electronic Strip

The Full Electronic Strip for Pending Departure Flight on ACC position is the following:

Atype/WT FR FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


PEL/CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN FCK ADEP Route ADES Date
SSR TAS XFL REG N. AIDCin AIDC out Equipment Free Text

Figure 228 – Full Pending DEP Strip on ACC


The Reduced Electronic Strip for Pending Departure Flight on ACC position is the following:
Atype/WT FR FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4
PEL/CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN XFL FCK ADEP Route ADES Date

Figure 229 – Reduced Pending DEP Strip on ACC

The Full Electronic Strip for Arriving Flight on ACC position is the following:
Atype/WT FR FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4
PEL/CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN FCK ADEP Route ADES Date
SSR TAS XFL REG N. AIDCin AIDC out Equipment Free Text
Figure 230 – Full ARR Strip on ACC

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 297 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The Full Electronic Strip for Arriving Flight on ACC position is the following:
Atype/WT FR FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4
PEL/CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN XFL FCK ADEP Route ADES Date

Figure 231 – Reduced ARR Strip on ACC

10.8.3.2 ARR Electronic Strip

The Full Electronic Strip for Pending Arrival Flight on ACCposition is the following:
Atype/WT FR FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4
PEL/CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN FCK ADEP Route ADES Date
SSR TAS XFL REG N. AIDCin AIDC out Equipment Free Text

Figure 232 – Full ARR Pending Strip on ACC

The Reduced Electronic Strip for Pending Arrival Flight on ACCposition is the following:
Atype/WT FR FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4
PEL/CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN XFL FCK ADEP Route ADES Date

Figure 233 – Reduced ARR Pending Strip on ACC

The Full Electronic Strip for Arriving Flight on ACC position is the following:
Atype/WT FR FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4
PEL/CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN FCK ADEP Route ADES Date
SSR TAS XFL REG N. AIDCin AIDC out Equipment Free Text
Figure 234 – Full ARR Strip on ACC

The Full Electronic Strip for Arriving Flight on ACC position is the following:
Atype/WT FR FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4
PEL/CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN XFL FCK ADEP Route ADES Date

Figure 235 – Reduced ARR Strip on ACC

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 298 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.8.3.3 En-route Electronic Strip

The Full Electronic Strip for En-route Flight on ACC position is the following:
Atype/WT FR FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4
PEL/CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN FCK ADEP Route ADES Date
SSR TAS XFL REG N. AIDCin AIDC out Equipment Free Text
Figure 236 – Full Pending ENR Strip on ACC (east-weast, south-north)

Atype/WT FR FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


PEL/CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN FCK ADEP Route ADES Date
SSR TAS XFL REG N. AIDCin AIDC out Equipment + FPL2012 Free Text
Figure 237 – Full ENR Strip on ACC (east-weast, south-north)

Atype/WT FR FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


PEL/CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN FCK ADEP Route ADES Date
SSR TAS XFL REG N. AIDCin AIDC out Equipment + FPL2012 Free Text
Figure 238– Full Pending ENR Strip on ACC (weast-east, north-south)

Atype/WT FR FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


PEL/CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN FCK ADEP Route ADES Date
SSR TAS XFL REG N. AIDCin AIDC out Equipment + FPL2012 Free Text
Figure 239 – Full ENR Strip on ACC (weast-east, north-south)

The Reduced Electronic Strip for En-route Flighton ACC position is the following:

Atype/WT FR PEL/CFL FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN XFL FCK ADEP AIRWAY ADES Date

Figure 240 – Reduced ENR Strip on ACC (east-weast, south-north)

Atype/WT FR FIX 1 FIX 2 FIX 3 FIX 4


PEL/CFL ETO 1 ETO 2 ETO 3 ETO 4
CALLSIGN XFL FCK ADEP Route ADES Date

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 299 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 241– Reduced ENR Strip on ACC (weast-east, north-south)

10.8.4 Electronic Strip Contents


Presentation All the positions It is possible to manually show the
ESB on any console and with any ATC
function.
Number 1
Background Opaque
Management Refer to paragraph 5
Contains All the main information related to
the flight over which the controller
will control.
Flight In Flight activation and Assume of
Control of the Flight
Flight Out Assume of Control from the another
sector or report on the last AoR
point (flight termination)
Strip groups The following Strip groups are
available:
 ENR: the group is composed by
en-route flights strips;
 DEP: the group is composed by
departing flights strips;
 ARR: the group is composed by
arriving flights strips.
Sorting The following criteria are available The Strip Ordering Button Located in
for each group: the upper left corner of the ESB allows
 for DEP group: ETO on OUTFX the controller to order strips according
and PEL to flight levels
 for the ARR group: ETL and PEL
 for the ENR group: ETO on
OUTFX and PEL
Fields ATYPE/WT Aircraft type/Wake Turbulence
Category
SID Standard Instrument Departure
STAR Standard instrument Arrival
RWY Departure Runway or Landing Runway
ETD/ATD Estimated Take Off Time (white
colour)
Actual Take Off Time (green colour)
ASSR Actual SSR code

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 300 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

PSSR/NSSR Previous/Next SSR Code


TAS True Air Speed
RFL Requested Flight Level
CALLSIGN Flight identifier
Date Date of the flight plan (YYDDMM)
ADEP Departure Airport
ADES Destination Airport
PKB Parking bay
PEL Planned Entry Level
CFL Cleared Flight Level
XFL Exit Flight Level
STUP Start Up Clearence
ST time Start Up Time
PUSH Push Back Clearence
PB time Push Back Time
TAXI Taxi Clearence
TX time Taxi Time
FIX1 First Fix of AoR in trajectory (inbound).
(crossing fixes and system fixes are
not displayed the fixes remains fixed
on the strip upon position report)
ETO 1 Estimated Time Over (hhmm) FIX1
(ETD for departing flights)
FIX 2 Second Fix in trajectory.
(crossing fixes and system fixes are
not displayed the fixes remains fixed
on the strip upon position report)
ETO 2 Estimated Time Over (hhmm) FIX 2
FIX 3 Third Fix in trajectory.
(crossing fixes and system fixes are
not displayed the fixes remains fixed
on the strip upon position report)
ETO 3 Estimated Time Over (hhmm) FIX 3
FIX 4 Last Fix of AoR in trajectory
(outbound).
(crossing fixes and system fixes are
not displayed the fixes remains fixed
on the strip upon position report)

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 301 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

ETO 4 Estimated Time Over (hhmm) FIX 4


(ETL for landing flights)
REG NUM Registration number
FR Flight rule
FREE TEXT Free text
RVSM Reduced Vertical Separation Minima.
It can be filled by the following
characters:
 W RVSM Approved
 S Non RVSM Approved and State
Aircraft
 N Neither RVSM Approved nor
State Aircraft
If the status has been manually
inserted or changed by the controller
the background colour of the RVSM
status field is changed as “white”.
833-Status Frequency Channel Spacing Status. It
can be filled by the following
characters:
 Y 8.33 equipped
 U UHF equipped
 N Neither
833-Permission Frequency Channel Spacing
Permission. It can be filled by the
following characters:
 E 8.33 exempted RVSM Approved
 K 8.33 unknown
RNAV BRNAV equipment indication
MDS Mode S Equipped indications.
D Deviation Alert indicator
FCK Formality Check
Route Flight plan route
AIDC in AIDC information for inbound
AIDC out AIDC information for outbound
Orders Refer to paragraph Errore.
L'origine riferimento non è stata
trovata. “Flight Orders”
Electronic Strip Contents

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 302 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.8.5 Electronic Strips Interactions


ADDRESSABLE LB Button MB Button RB Button
FIELD
Control Field Hook the flight plan Shift the flight plan Resize the layout of
the strip (big/small)
CALLSIGN To recall Planner To recall Executive To recall Flight Data
Menu. Menu. Menu.
SID Departure Clarence SID Choice Window
STAR Arrival Clearance STAR Choice Window

RWY TKF Preview Window RWY Choice Window


LND Preview Window
ASSR SSR code assignment
Preview Window
CALLSIGN Planner Menu Executive Menu Flight Menu
ADEP En route Clearance
ADES FPL message page FLDA page
PKB PKB Preview Window
CFL/ PEL CFL/PEL Choice
Window
XFL XFL Choice Window
STUP STUP Choice Window
ST time Undo Start Up
PUSH PUSH Choice Window
PB time Undo Push Back
TAXI Taxi Choice Window
TX time Undo Taxi
FIX1-FIX4 Position Report
Preview Window
ETO1-ETO4 Estimated Revision
Preview Window
REG NUM Registration Number
Preview Window
FR Change Type/Flight
Rule Preview Window
FREE TEXT Free Text Preview
Window
RVSM RVSM Choice Window

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 303 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

ADDRESSABLE LB Button MB Button RB Button


FIELD
8.33 8.33 Choice Window
RNAV RNAV Choice Window
MDS MDS Choice Window
AIDC IN/OUT Phone Coordination
Preview Window when
PHO state is displayed
Electronic Strip Interactions

10.8.6 Electronic Strips Colours Customization

10.8.6.1 Control Field


Different colours are used to distinguish:
Blue East-West flight direction (from 325° to°145°)
Yellow West-Eastflight direction (from 145° to 325°)
Light brown No-Direction, degraded flight or flight transferred to a
325°

145°

10.8.6.2 Strip Contour


Different colours are used to distinguish:
White Hooked flight
Light grey Flight not hooked

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 304 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.8.6.3 Background
The following colours are applied on electronic strip according to type of flight (arrival, departure,
en-route), status of the flight (pending, active, live, terminated) and sector family type (tower,
approach, acc):

TYPE of FLIGHT TWR APP ACC


DEPARTURE
242 242 242 242 242 242 242 242 242
pending
DEPARTURE
255 255 153 255 255 153 NA
act, live, term
ARRIVAL
242 242 242 242 242 242 242 242 242
pending
ARRIVAL
159 205 221 159 205 221 159 205 221
act, live, term
EN-ROUTE
pending NA NA 176 202 218
east-west, south-north
EN-ROUTE
act, live, term NA NA 84 141 212
east-west, south-north
EN-ROUTE
pending NA NA 255 253 185
west- east, north- south
EN-ROUTE
act, live, term NA NA 231 226 0
west- east, north- south

10.8.6.4 Fields
The default colour of the text inside the strip is dark brown if the flight is controlled (owner).
The colour of the text inside the strips is dark gray if the flight is not controlled (not owner).

PEL/CFL
Different colours are used to distinguish:
Orange Lateral deviation detected
Magenta Coordination proposal received from the previous sector
Default Coordination proposal accepted

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 305 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Cyan Coordination proposal send to the previous sector


ETO
Green Position report performed

FIX
Orange Lateral deviation

CALLSIGN
Different colours are used to distinguish:
Magenta Handover receiving flight (AOC-receiving sector)
Cyan Handover sending flight (TOC-sending sector)
Dark pink Advanced Information status

XFL
Different colours are used to distinguish:
Cyan Coordination proposal send to the next sector/AIDC unit
Default Coordination proposal accepted
Magenta Coordination proposal received from the next sector/AIDC unit
Brown Rejection received from the next sector AIDC unit
Orange Phone Coordination request

PEL
Different colours are used to distinguish:
Cyan Coordination proposal send to the previous sector/AIDC unit
Default Coordination proposal accepted
Green Coordination proposal received from the previous sector/AIDC unit
Brown Rejection received from the previous sector/AIDC unit
Orange Phone Coordination request

COO/PCO
Brown COO/PCO reminder

Strips related to terminate flights are displayed with a red diagonal line from left bottom to upper
right corner.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 306 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.8.7 Distribution of Stripsto Controllers


The distribution of electronic strip for pending flights (IFR flights) is performed according a set of
posting rules that can be modified according the customer requests.
Pending 8strip is displayed on all sectors(TWR, APP, ACC)involved in the trajectory;

The distribution of electronic strip for Departure flights (IFR flights) is performed according a set
of posting rules that can be modified according the customer requests. An example of Strip
posting rules is:
At the departure clearance the strip is displayed on all sectors(TWR, APP, ACC)involved in the
trajectory;
At the Transfer from the current owner sector to other concerned sector the electronic strip is
deleted on the sending sector position and it is updated on all remaining sectors;
At the position report on the last AOR POINT, or landing report for Domestic flights, the
electronic strip displayed on the last sector is marked by a red cross line indicating the live to
terminated state transition;
The electronic strip is deleted from this position a Variable System Parameter time after the
flight termination (TERMOUT on AFS system parameter of FDA position).
The posting of electronic strip for En-route/Arrival flights (IFR flights) is performed according to
the following rules:
At the reception of a notification message (AIDC ABI) the transition from Inactive to Pending is
performed the flights is presented in ESB and in the pending list;
At the reception of an activation message (AIDC EST or CPL) or automatically a Variable
System Parameter time before the ETO (Estimate Time Over the inbound POINT) the transition
from Pending to Active is performed and the strip is displayed all sectors involved in the
trajectory;
At the automatic position report on a predefined inbound Point (i.e. the first AOR point) or after a
manual position report on the inbound Point the electronic strip already displayed is updated;
At the Transfer of the flight from the first inbound sector to the next ACC/APP Controller
(TOC/AOC procedure) the electronic strip is deleted on the first position (only if all the points
related to the previous sector are reported) and it is updated on the next sector and all
concerned ones;
At the Transfer from the current owner sector to other concerned sector the electronic strip is
deleted on the sending sector position and it is updated on all remaining concerned ones;
At the position report on the last AoR POINT (or landing report) the electronic strip displayed on
the last sector is marked by a red cross line indicating the live to terminated state transition;

8
The preactivation from inactive o pending occurs automatically according to parameter time configurable on
the FDA (PREACTDEP and PREACTINB on AFS system parameter).

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 307 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

The electronic strip is deleted from this position a Variable System Parameter time after the
flight termination (TERMLND on AFS system parameter of FDA position).
On approach position On APP position the controller is enabled to display only departure flight
or only arrival flight by means of two dedicated button (ARR e DEP):
 If the ARR button is pressed, all the arrival strip presentation are removed and only departing
strip are displayed on ESB. If DEP button is pressed, all the departure strips are removed from
ESB and only arrival strips are displayed on ESB.

10.8.8 Paper Strip Layouts


The Paper Strips layout is the same defined for electronic strip in §10.8.1.
The following arrows shall be displayed on paper strips to identify the flight plan type:
Type of Flight Arrow
Departure

Arrival

Enroute (east to west)

Enroute (west to east)

10.9 Mtcd Management


The automated Medium Term Conflict Detection (MTCD) function will assist the controllers in
monitoring the air situation continuously by providing conflict data through HMI.
MTCD shall support conflict detection for all flights for which a system trajectory is available. MTCD
will start conflict detection for a flight when it is a pre-defined time from entering the area of
operation (i.e. when the flight turns its state to pending), and continue conflict detection for this flight
until it leaves this area.
MTCD is foreseen to cover all phases of flight.
MTCD will detect loss of separation between system trajectories of two aircraft (aircraft to aircraft
encounters) or between a system trajectory of an aircraft and a SUA area (Aircraft to Area
encounters).
The conflict information as well as SFPL information are presented through graphical and tabular
displays (MTCD list).

10.9.1 Aircraft To Aircraft Encounters


The Medium Term conflict detection can detect the following risk/conflict between aircrafts:

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 308 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Risk of Type A
Risk of Type B
Vertical Risk
Conflict
RISK of Type A: The risk of type A is detected for controlled flights when the distance between
the estimated positions (2D) of two aircrafts is less than the required separation criteria and a
vertical loss of separation occurs between the layers defined by Cleared Flight Level (CFL) and
eXit Flight Level (XFL). This kind of risk is always displayed in yellow colour in the HMI (MTCD
LIST, Flight leg, Vertical AID Window).
RISK of Type B: The risk of type B is detected for entering flights when the distance between the
estimated positions (2D) of two aircrafts is less than the required separation criteria and a vertical
loss of separation occurs between the layers defined by Planned Entry Level (PEL) and eXit Flight
Level (XFL). This kind of risk is always displayed in blue colour in the HMI (MTCD LIST, Flight leg,
Vertical AID Window).
Vertical Risk: The Vertical Risk is detected only upon opening of the VAW when the distance
between the estimated positions (2D) of two aircrafts is less than the required separation criteria
but they are separated in terms of vertical separation (e.g. two flights with the same route in terms
of time and fixes but different levels). This kind of risk is always displayed in green colour in the
HMI (only Vertical AID Window).
Conflict: The conflict is detected when in the same frame the distance between the estimated
positions (2D) of two aircrafts is less than the required separation criteria, and a vertical loss of
separation occurs between the layers defined by Actual Flight Level (AFL) and Cleared Flight
Level (CFL)
The Controller can display the aircraft to aircraft encounters on the CWP notification in the
following HMI object:
Track Label
Flight leg
MTCD list
MTCD Tentative list
Vertical Aid Window
Figure 242 – Mtcd Hmi (Conflict And Sua Infringement) On Track Label
Flight Leg:
By recalling the flight leg of the flight plan involved in the conflict, it will be presented the
segment of conflict/risks in with continuous line in dedicated colour:
Red : Conflict
Yellow: Risk type A
Blue : Risk type B

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 309 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 243 - Mtcd Hmi On Flight Leg, Conflict Detection

If an Aircraft to airspace encounters is detected, the trajectory involved in the infringement is


displayed in orange colour. Also the contour of the special usage area under detection will be
coloured in orange.
The flight leg can be quickly opened by clicking with AB on the Callsign/area of the flight in
the MTCD list.

Figure 244 – Mtcd Hmi On Flight Leg, Sua Infringement Detection

MTCD LIST:
The MTCD list can be automatically opened when a conflict/risk enters in list

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 310 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Figure 245 - MTCD List

In the MTCD list the colour of the ID and callsigns of the flight plans, identifies the type of
conflict/infringement, for the Aircraft to Aircraft encounter the colours of ID are:
 Red : Conflict
 Yellow: Risk type A
 Blue : Risk type B
Aircraft to airspace infringment has ID colour orange. (see ID30 in figure 66).
Otherwise the background of the single item is a lighter gray to quickly distinguish on the list
the type of conflict/infringement.
Finally the name of the Callsign and the name of the Special Usage Area is orange.
By clicking on the legend name of the list, it is possible to sort the list accordingly (e.g. click
on ID, sort by ID, click on CALLSIGN1, sort by callsing1, etc.)

MTCD Tentative LIST:


The MTCD tentative list is opened upon a TRY on a flight plan trajectory and shows the
eventual conflict that will be generated if the tentative trajectory would be applied.
MTCD TENTATIVE LIST
LESS
TIME ID C CALLSIGN1 C CALLSIGN 2 DIST

0 026 INA38 INA18 0


1 028 AZA002 AZA001 0
2 029 DHL233 SAS454 0
5 030 QTR011 SUA01 0
12 031 INA343 SAS421 0
Mtcd Tentative List

The MTCD tentative list has the same colour for the ID of the MTCD list (red, yellow, blue,
orange).

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 311 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Vertical Aid Widow:


The VAW can be quickly opened by clicking with IB on the Callsign of the flight in the MTCD
list or with WB click on the XFL field of the electronic strip of the flight plan.

Figure 246 - Mtcd Hmi On Vaw

In the VAW the colour of the band identifies the type of conflict/infringement, for the Aircraft
to Aircraft encounter the colours of colour of the bands are:
 Red : Conflict
 Yellow: Risk type A
 Blue : Risk type B

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 312 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.10 What-if Management

10.10.1.1 Horizontal trajectory probe


After a probe (Edit function) if the MTCD discover a potential conflict the presentation on the
trajectory will be the following:
Dotted red trajectory: for potential conflict
Dotted yellow trajectory: for potential type A risk
Dotted blue trajectory: for potential type B risk

Figure 247 - Mtcd Hmi (Conflict Detected) After A Probe On A Flight Plan Trajectory

In the same way the potential conflicts/risks are displayed on VAW with the relevant colours
(red, yellow or blue).

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 313 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.10.1.2 Try of a CFL/XFL

The CWP allows the ATCO to execute a try upon the execution of a CFL or XFL order:

The following choice window is opened for the execution of a CFL or XFL order:

Figure 248 – CFL with try function

If the ATCO clicks on TRY button and then on the value, the tentative trajectory is submitted
to the MTCD.
If the ATCO clicks directly on the CFL/XFL value, the trajectory is immediately updated.
The ATCO is also enabled to execute a CFL/XFL try directly acting from the VAW.
On the left side of the VAW the CFL level is displayed while on the right side the XFL is
displayed.
By drag&drop the CFL/XFL label, the CFL/XFL try is executed, upon enter the tentative
trajectory is displayed on the VAW in blue dotted colour and submitted to MTCD.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 314 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.10.1.3 Try of a DCT


The CWP allows the ATCO to execute a try upon the execution of a DCT order:
The following choice window is opened for the execution of a try of a DCT:

If the ATCO clicks on TRY button and then on the fix, the tentative trajectory is submitted to the
MTCD, if a conflict is detected itwill be displayed on VAW, MTCD tentative list and GRP .
If the ATCO clicks directly on the fix, the trajectory is immediately updated.

Figure 249 – DCT with try function

10.10.1.4 Try of a ETO


The CWP allows the ATCO to execute a try upon the execution of a REV order on a reporting
fix.The following choice window is opened for the execution of a REV order:

Figure 250 - ETO with try function

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 315 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

 If the ATCO clicks on TRY button and then on ENTER, the tentative trajectory is submitted to
the MTCD.
 If the ATCO clicks directly on ENTER value, the trajectory is immediately updated.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 316 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.11 MODE – S Management


The introduction of Mode-S will cause deep changes both in the CWP functions and CWP
HMI.
The SFPL-Track correlation criteria is subjected to major changes.
The eligibility process in the system is performed by a function called CORM.
A track is classified as eligible if it is not yet correlated.
An SFPL (or AFPL) is classified as eligible if it is not correlated to a track and its Procedural
State is ACTIVE or LIVE.
A SFPL is eligible for received Callsign correlation if:
it is Mode S equipped, with aircraft identification reporting capability (MDS=I/S in item 10 of
SFPL), and

The CWP sub-system, is able to use for the SFPL-track correlation the following keys:
 SSR Code;
 Call Sign;
 ICAO Address.

The received callsign is used to pre-fill the Callsign field of the Identify mask and Fast Flight
Plan.
The SSR code is used to pre-fill the P-CODE field of the Identify mask and Fast Flight Plan

In Fig. 4.4-1 a) and b) the criteria to assign the Conspicuity Codes/SSR codes are shown in case of
transition, in the same ATC unit, from an Airspace Mode-S covered and an Airspace Not Mode-S
covered.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 317 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

Area covered by Mode A radar a)

SSR Code Mode A Assigned

Area covered by
Mode S radar

Elegible for
automatic
Conspicuity Code
Assignment

Area covered by Mode S radar b)

Conspicuity Code Assigned

Area covered by
Mode A radar
- Callsign (Mode S
information) not
available.
- Duplicated Conspicuity
Code .
- Elegible for automatic
SSR Code Mode A
Assignment

Figure 251 – Transitions from Mode-S Airspace to Not Mode-S Airspace and viceversa

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 318 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

a) For flights coming from an Area covered by Mode A radar (ASSR Mode A code
assigned) and entering in the Mode S Airspace, the CWP will assign the conspicuity code
value as NSSR. In this case, if the flight squawks the NSSR (upon controller order) it shall be
correlated by means of Callsign else the flight shall remain Mode A correlated.
b) For flights coming from an Area covered by Mode S radar (ASSR Mode A =
conspicuity code) and entering in the Mode A Airspace, the FDP will assign the mode A code
(according to SSR code assignment rules e.g. ORCAM) as NSSR . In this case the flight
squawks the NSSR (upon controller order) and shall be correlated with Mode A.
An additional order to set the Mode S Equipment for the selected Flight Plan is provided by
the Controller Working Position.
A dedicated symbol position visualizes the plot position and the system track position of a
target containing data coming from a Mode-S Radar source.
Moreover the HMI provides the possibility to configure the visualization, on track label, or in
dedicated Lists of data available from Mode S data link. The new available information are:
 Callsign;
 24 Bits Aircraft Address
 Magnetic Heading
 Air Speed (Indicated Airspeed)
 Air Speed (Mach Number)
 Selected Altitude9
 Vertical Rate
 Track Angle Rate
 Roll Angle
 Ground Speed
 True Track Angle
 Communication Capability

The current customization of the mode-s information on the pending radar track label is shown
below.

W R N G A W R N G B
A M O D A ● R C A L S G N
A A F L ↑ G S P D

Figure 252 - Uncorrelated Track

9
If an aircraft is flying under the Transition Level, the displayed Selected Altitude shall be corrected
according to the local barometric pressure value.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 319 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

If the received callsign is present it will be presented on the AMODA field, by clicking with IB
button the presentation of mode code/received callsign is switched
On the correlated radar track label, the flight data plan the mode-s field are customize as
following

W R N G A W R N G B ▲ C P
C A L S I G N ● R X X X X X X R C A L S G N
A A F L ↑ C F L * Y Y Y Y Y
G S P D X F L ↑
A H D G X A S P Z Z Z Z

Figure 253 - Controlled Track


xxxxxx= NXT/TYPE/W
yyyyy=OUTFX/SCTFX/ADES for enroute
yyyyy=SIDIDT for departure
yyyyy=STARIDT for arrival
zzzz=ARC/ROCD
The received Mode-S data are presented also on FHI (please refer to chapter Errore. L'origine
riferimento non è stata trovata.).
The CWP alerts the controller when a received data from Mode-s is different from the related flight
plan data. In particular if a mismatch is detected between certain information, a yellow square will be
displayed around the flight plan data field on the track label and on the received mode-s data field
on the FHI list.
The warning check is executed on the following field and the warning is always displayed as a
yellow square around the relevant field:

TRACK LABEL (FLIGHT PLAN DATA) FHI (MODE-S RECEIVED DATA)


CALLSING CSREC
CFL SEL
AHGDX MAGN
ASP in machs MACHS
ASP in knot KNOT
ARC/D V RATE

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 320 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.12 Warning And Reminders Management


The following warning and deviation are displayed on CWP:
 CFL DEVIATION: FL warning in line zero and FHI
 LATERAL DEVIATION: arrow left/right on track label and fhi
 HEADING DEVIATION: HDG text in line zero
 MODE-S DEVIATION: yellow square on the label and fhi field deviating
 TOC/AOC REMINDER: TOC/AOC text in line zero
 OVERDUE CORRELATION: ETI in yellow colour on SIL, SCT list and ESB
 MISLINK: Magenta tracks
 DOUBLE MODE CODE: orange position symbol of the tracks
 DOUBLE RECEIVED CALLSIGN: dedicated oversymbol (circle) on track label.
 SINGLE RADAR TRACK DETECTION: yellow position symbol of the tracks

10.13 SNET Management

The SNET system integrates a function, called TCA, that looks ahead a short period of time to
prevent, based on tracked radar data, present and future conflict situations.

The following types of conflicts can be detected by the SNET system:

Short Term Conflict Alert (STCA), aircraft to aircraft conflict;

Area Aproximity Infringement Warning (APW), aircraft to dangerous, TSA and restricted areas
conflict;

Minimum Safe Altitude Warning (MSAW), aircraft to ground conflict.

Approach Path Alarm Monitoring (APAM), aircraft to Glide Path Cone (volumes of airspace).

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 321 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.13.1 Short Term Conflict Alert (STCA)


An STCA is triggered whenever the planar and vertical distances between two aircrafts already are
(actual conflict) or will be in a short time (predicted conflict) simultaneously lower than the
corresponding thresholds, adaptive to the airspace.
The detection of STCA conflicts is not an event-driven process, but rather a cyclic process (typically
5 seconds, system parameter).
Because the kinetic features of the aircrafts motion considerably depend on the interested airspace
(for example, route vs. terminal area), the protected airspace is volumetrically partitioned, to have
the possibility to use in the STCA conflicts detection different sets of parameters, adaptive to the
different airspaces.

10.13.2 Area Proximity Infringement Warning (APW)

An APW is generated by the SNET system when a flight is detected as likely to enter a volume of
airspace that has been, temporarily or permanently, defined as dangerous.
The APW detectors are activated every time a new STCA detection cycle begins and it applies both
to actual and predicted tracks positions.
A prism, i.e., a set of contour points and an altitude interval, defines each dangerous area;
furthermore, for each dangerous area a validity time interval can be defined.

10.13.3 Minimum Safe Altitude Warning (MSAW)

A MSAW is generated by the SNET system when an aircraft level (mode C) is likely to descend
below a preset figure ensuring safe clearance from the ground.
The MSAW detectors are activated every time a new STCA detection cycle begins and it applies
both to actual and predicted tracks positions.
Minimum safe altitudes can be defined on the whole coverage by a set of polygons, together with
the altitude thresholds associated to each polygon.

10.13.4 Approach Path Alarm Monitoring (APAM)

An APAM is generated by the SNET system when the position of an arrival flight is detected doesn’t
belong the defined Glide Path cone.
The APAM detectors are activated every time a new STCA detection cycle begins and it applies
both to actual and predicted tracks positions.
The Glide Path Cone (volumes of airspace) can be defined by a set of geometrical parameters.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 322 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.13.5 Safety Net Region Handling


The SNET Region Handling allows to the supervisor operator the following capabilities:

Activate/deactivate Safety Nets sub functions


Activate/deactivate Safety Nets areas, in order to enable/disable a single function on that area,
Display Safety Nets areas (offline defined),
DisplaySafety Nets area parameters.
If SNET REGION HANDLING is selected from the SNET menu (into the MAP menu), it is possible to
choice one among the following items:

MSAW Region Descriptor to open the MSAW region List,


APW Region Descriptor to open the APW region List.

10.13.5.1 Msaw Region List

The list contains the following fields:Figure 254 - MSAW Region List

Fields Means Interaction


ID Region Identifier
STATUS MSAW region STATUS AB Click to set the region status.
MSAFE Minimum safe altitude for the
MSAW region
ACTIVATION MSAW Region Activation date
DEACTIVATION MSAW Region Deactivation date
LAT Look Ahead Time
PEN PEN filter status
MIL MIL filter status
VFR VFR filter status

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 323 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

IFR IFR filter status


GAT GAT filter status
OAT OAT filter status
AIRP

10.13.5.2 Msaw Property Editor Preview

Figure 255 - MSAW Property Editor

The MSAW property editor allows to modify the following data:

Parameters

LAT Look Ahead Time


FT_UP Upper layer of the map
STATUS MSAW region STAUS
MIL It allows to exclude form APW calculations tracks associated to a
military fight plan
IFR IFR filter status
VFR VFR filter status
GAT GAT filter status
OAT OAT filter status
Airport
ACTIVATION MSAW Region Activation date
DEACTIVATION MSAW Region Deactivation date
WEEKDAYS LEGEND Time of activation and deactivation for each Day of Week.
(DAY_FROM, DAY_TO)

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 324 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.13.6 APWSUA region list

Figure 256 - APWSUA region list

The list contains the following fields:


Fields Means Interaction
VIS Region Visibility AB Click to select the ON/OFF
visibility
ID APWSUA Region Identifier AB Click to open the APWSUA
Property Editor
STATUS APWSUA region STATUS AB Click to set the region status.
FL LOW Lower flight level of the STCA
region
FL UPP Upper flight level of the STCA
region
ACTIVATION STCA Region Activation date
DEACTIVATION STCA Region Deactivation date
LAT Look Ahead Time
PEN PEN filter status
VFR VFR filter status
IFR IFR filter status
MIL MIL filter status
CRO CRO filter status
8.33 8.33 filter status
GAT GAT filter status
OAT OAT filter status
TYPE Region Type
APW/SUA YES/NO: if the map is also a
SUAmap

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 325 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED
15/10/2014
C13004.02-1083UM rev 01.00

10.13.6.1 APWSUA PROPERTY EDITOR Preview

The APWSUA property editor allows to modify the following data:

Parameters:

FT_LOW Lower flight level of the APW/SUAregion


FT_UPP Upper flight level of the APW/SUAregion
LAT Look Ahead Time
PEN It allows to exclude from APW calculations the pending tracks
STATUS APW/SUAregion STATUS
MIL It allows to exclude form APW calculations tracks associated to a
military fight plan
IFR IFR filter
GAT GAT filter
VFR VFR filter
OAT OAT filter
8.33 It allows to exclude form APW calculations aircraft which are equipped
with a 8.33 KHz transmitter
TYPE Region Type
ACTIVATION APW/SUARegion Activation date
DEACTIVATION APW/SUA Region Deactivation date
WEEKDAYS LEGEND Time of activation and deactivation for each Day of Week.
(DAY_FROM, DAY_TO)

10.13.7 Safety Net Region Filtering


The SNET Region Handling allows to the operator the following capabilities:

Activate/deactivate Safety Nets sub functions (MSAW, APW),


Activate/deactivate Safety Nets warning for single flight,
Filtering tracks according to pre-selection/selection and rules.

Template Id: CFM001-T-IT En rev. 00 © Copyright Selex ES S.p.A. - All Rights Reserved Page 326 of 326
NON CLASSIFICATO / UNCLASSIFIED

You might also like